Quarterlytics / Technology / Information Technology Services / Redcentric plc

Redcentric plc

rcn · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker rcn
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry Information Technology Services
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2023 Annual Report · Redcentric plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
2023

R E P O R T   &   AC C O U N T S

Year ended 31 March 2023 | Redcentric plc
Company Number 08397584

Redcentric is a digital transformation partner 

providing highly available connectivity, 

colocation, cloud, communications and cyber 

security solutions that help public and private 

sector organisations to succeed.

Assured Availability 

Organisational Agility 

Smarter Working 

2

Contents

Strategic Report

Highlights 

Chairman’s Statement

Chief Executive Officer’s Review

Financial Review

Alternative Performance Measures

Strategy and Business Model 

Section 172 Statement

Risk Management 

Corporate Responsibility 

Sustainability Reporting

Governance

Introduction to Governance 

Corporate Governance 

Board of Directors

Audit Committee Report

Directors’ Remuneration Report

Directors’ Report 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

Financial Statements

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Redcentric plc

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement of financial position 

Consolidated cash flow statement 

Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

Company balance sheet 

Company statement of changes in equity 

Notes to the company financial statements 

Directors and advisers 

3

5

7

8

12

20

25

26

30

32

36

54

55

62

64

66

72

76

77

84

85

86

87

88

132

133

134

139

Section titleAnnual Report and Accounts 2023F I N A N C I A L   H I G H L I G H T S

Total revenue 

£141.7m

+51.8%

Recurring revenue 

£128.5m

+54.8%

Adjusted EBITDA

£24.5m

+3.3%

Adjusted  
operating profit 

£8.6m

-45.6%

4

Strategic reportHighlights

Financial performance measures

Total revenue

Recurring revenue 1

Recurring revenue percentage1

Adjusted EBITDA1

Adjusted operating profit 1

Reported operating (loss)/profit

Adjusted cash generated from operations1

Reported cash generated from operations

Net debt1

Adjusted net debt1

Adjusted basic earnings per share1

Reported basic (loss)/earnings per share

Percentage change calculated on absolute values 

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
(“FY23”)

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
(“FY22”) 

£141.7m  

£128.5m  

90.7%

£24.5m  

£8.6m  

(£8.9m) 

£23.1m  

£14.8m  

(£73.0m)

(£35.6m)

2.66p  

(5.94p) 

Change 

51.8%

54.8%

1.8%

3.3%

(45.6%)

(235.3%)

19.6%

(13.8%) 

(339.5%)

(2,271.8%)

£93.3m 

£83.0m  

88.9%

£23.7m 

£15.9m 

£6.6m 

£19.3m 

£17.2m 

(£16.6m)

(£1.5m)

7.68p 

4.43p 

(65.3%)

(231.4%)

1  This  annual  report  and  accounts  contains  certain  financial  measures  that  are  not  defined  or  recognised  under  IFRS  but  are  presented  to  provide 

readers with additional financial information that is evaluated by management and investors in assessing the performance of the Group. 

This additional information presented is not uniformly defined by all companies and may not be comparable with similarly 
titled measures and disclosures from other companies. These measures are unaudited and should not be viewed in isolation 
or as an alternative to those measures that are derived in accordance with IFRS.

For  an  explanation  of  the  alternative  performance  measures  used  in  this  report  and  reconciliations  to  their  most  directly 
related GAAP measure, please refer to pages 16 & 20 - 24.

5

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportStrategic report

Annual Report and Accounts 2023

“ We visited quite a few 

co-locations and chose 
Redcentric for its ‘can do’ 
approach and the warm 

and cheerful welcome.”

666
6

Chairman’s statement

I am very pleased to introduce the annual report and accounts (“Report”) for the Redcentric plc 

(“Redcentric” or “Company”) group of companies (the “Group”) for the financial year ended  

31 March 2023 (“FY23”).  

Overview and financial results 

Dividend and share buyback

These  results  demonstrate  an  inflection  point  for  the 
business,  the  annualised  impact  of  the  FY22  acquisitions 
together with the Sungard and 4D acquisitions made in FY23 
have  transformed  the  business  both  in  terms  of  capability 
and scale. Revenues have grown by 52% in the financial year 
FY23 and on a run rate basis are c.75% higher than the pre-
acquisition period of FY21. The acquisitions have enhanced 
our  product  offerings  with  Hyper  cloud  transformation  
and  Cyber  Security  professional  services  being  added  to  
our portfolio. 

The recent data centre acquisitions mean that electricity costs 
are key to the financial performance of the business, and we 
continue  to  invest  in  energy  efficiency  measures  to  reduce 
consumption  whilst  also  being  very  active  in  the  energy 
market.  We  have  limited  any  commodity  price  volatility  in 
FY24 by agreeing own-use commodity contracts to fix prices 
and we have also taken advantage of the relatively favourable 
energy market by fixing a significant proportion of our FY25 
requirements.  

With  both  the  synergy  and  energy  efficiency  programmes 
completing during the course of FY24, FY25 will be the first 
full year that reflects the full benefit of the acquisitions.

The business has also put a sustained effort into delivering 
organic  growth,  with  eleven  of  the  last  twelve  months 
trading  to  June  2023  showing  positive  net  new  business.  It 
is  particularly  pleasing  to  note  that  this  has  been  delivered 
through  a  combination  of  new  customers  and  delivering 
against  cross  selling  opportunities  as  a  result  of  broader 
product offerings and the enlarged customer base.

The  focus  for  FY24  will  be  to  complete  the  integration  of 
the  recently  acquired  businesses  and  to  continue  to  grow 
the  business  by  capitalising  on  the  excellent  opportunities 
provided by the acquisitions. Whilst further acquisitions are 
not  an  immediate  priority  for  the  company,  with  £41.5m  of 
its £80m committed bank facility drawn at the date of these 
accounts,  the  company  has  significant  firepower  should  an 
exceptional opportunity present itself.

During  the  year,  the  Board  declared  an  interim  dividend  of 
1.2 pence per share (FY22: 1.2 pence per share), with £1.9m 
paid on 27 January 2023 (FY22: £1.9m). 

A  final  dividend  of  2.4p  per  share  is  recommended  by  the 
board  of  directors  of  the  Company  (the  “Board”)  and  will 
result in a total dividend for FY23 of 3.6p per share (financial 
year ended 31 March 2022 “FY22”: 3.6p per share). Subject 
to approval by shareholders at the Company’s annual general 
meeting (“AGM”), this is expected to be paid on 19 January 
2024 to shareholders on the register at the close of business 
on  8  December  2023  with  shares  going  ex-dividend  on  7 
December 2023. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan 
elections is 27 December 2023. 

Board changes and people

On  21  July  2022,  Alan  Aubrey  was  appointed  as  a  Non-
Executive Director and Chair of the Audit Committee. Alan 
brings with him considerable market knowledge alongside a 
breadth and depth of skills and experience. 

from  the  Board.  Recruitment 

On  24  July  2023,  Helena  Feltham,  Non-Executive  Director, 
stepped  down 
for  her 
replacement is underway. On behalf of the Board and all at 
Redcentric  I  would  like  to  thank  Helena  for  her  significant 
contribution over the last two years and wish her all the very 
best for the future.

Outlook

The  business  is  benefitting  greatly  from  the  acquisitions  of 
Piksel, 7 Elements, Sungard (Consultancy and Data Centres) 
and  4D  made  in  the  last  two  financial  years  with  revenues 
growing  at  a  significant  pace.  The  integration  programmes 
are progressing well and the full effect of these will be seen 
in FY25, in addition the business has protected itself against 
increases  in  electricity  commodity  prices  in  FY24  and  has 
taken  actions  to  benefit  from  a  favourable  energy  market 
beyond FY24. 

The  factors  above  together  with  the  organic  growth 
momentum seen over the past twelve months, mean that the 
Board remains optimistic for the future of the business.

Nick Bate 
Chairman 
24 August 2023

7

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportChief Executive’s Review

Strategic execution 

FY23  has  been  a  pivotal  year  for  Redcentric,  the  capability 
acquisitions  of  Piksel  (Hyper  cloud  transformation)  and 
7  Elements  (Cyber  Security)  made  in  FY22  have  been 
quickly  integrated  and  are  providing  excellent  cross-sell 
opportunities across the enlarged customer base. 

To support and accelerate our acquisition strategy further a 
banking  facility  was  agreed  on  26  April  2022,  providing  us 
with significant additional funding at very competitive rates. 
Under this new four bank syndicate £80m of committed funds 
are  available  with  a  further  £20m  uncommitted  accordion 
facility available if required. 

With  the  funds  in  place  at  the  start  of  FY23,  the  business 
completed  three  acquisitions  in  quick  succession,  and  by 
July  2023  had  secured  the  Sungard  consultancy  business 
offering enhanced cyber security capability, and the 4D and 
Sungard  Data  centre  businesses  providing  significant  scale 
and a blue-chip customer base. 

At 31 March 2023, £34.0m of the £80.0m committed facility 
was net drawn to fund acquisitions.

As  a  result  of  these  five  acquisitions,  over  600  customers 
have been added to our existing base and we exit the year 
with  a  revenue  run  rate  (being  total  contracted  monthly 
revenue plus the delivered one-off revenue) of £160m which 
represents  a  75%  increase  on  FY21,  the  last  full  year  with 
no  impact  of  acquisitions.  Furthermore,  our  product  and 
solutions  offerings  have  been  strengthened  in  the  highest 
growing  areas  of  the  market,  giving  us  one  of  the  most 
comprehensive  IT  and  telecommunications  product  and 
solution offerings in the market.

the 

very  material  and 

Notwithstanding 
immediate 
revenue  growth,  a  return  to  profitability  will  take  longer 
to  materialise.  The  very  significant  and  complex  synergy 
and  energy  efficiency  programmes, 
the 
consideration  paid  for  the  acquisitions,  are  planned  to 
complete  during  the  course  of  FY24  meaning  that  FY25  
will  be  the  first  full  year  that  reflects  the  full  benefit  of  
the acquisitions.

reflected 

in 

Organic growth update

We continue to see strong organic growth, with an increase 
in  net  new  business  (new  business  plus  or  minus  renewal 
churn  less  cancellations  and  excluding  inflationary  price 
increases)  in  nine  of  the  last  ten  months  to  the  end  of  
March  2023.  Net  new  business  when  converted 
into  
revenue equates to an organic growth rate of approximately 
6%,  a  level  that  has  not  been  experienced  for  a  number  
of  years  and  we  expect  this  level  of  organic  growth  to 
continue into FY24.

8
8

improvement 

in  organic  growth 

The 
the 
increase  in  new  logos  and  delivering  against  the  cross-
selling  opportunities  to  existing  customers  as  a  result 
of  the  Group’s  broader  product  offering  and  enlarged  
customer base.

reflects 

Integration update

The  integration  programme  is  progressing  well  with  total 
synergies  of  £22.0m  now  forecast,  £5m  ahead  of  the 
expectations  at  the  time  of  the  H1  FY23  results.  £16.2m  of 
the total synergies have already been actioned and reflected 
in  the  run  rate,  with  the  balance  of  £5.8m  to  be  actioned 
throughout  the  course  of  FY24  and  effective  throughout 
both FY24 and FY25.

The  sale  of  the  Elland  data  centre  assets  anticipated  for 
December  2022  did  not  complete  due  to  buyer  funding 
issues  and  as  a  result  this  facility  will  now  be  retained  and 
developed  as  a  long-term  strategic  asset.  The  Harrogate 
data  centre  will  now  be  closed  instead  with  customer  and 
core  equipment  transferred  to  Elland  by  the  end  of  FY24. 
Annualised  savings  of  circa  £1.4m  are  anticipated  versus 
the  £0.6m  expected  for  Elland,  but  these  savings  will  now 
materialise in FY25 rather than FY24. 

The bulk of the remaining synergy activity relates to energy 
conservation  measures  (new  chiller  units  in  Heathrow)  and 
the closure of the Harrogate data centre.

Electricity sourcing & consumption

FY23  has  seen  the  most  volatile  electricity  pricing  for  a 
generation,  with  commodity  prices  reaching  as  high  as  
ten times historical averages. Whilst the government’s energy 
bill  relief  scheme,  put  in  place  during  the  year,  did  help  to 
reduce  costs,  the  scheme  did  not  cover  the  full  electricity 
consumption  and,  as  a  result,  FY23  profits  were  adversely 
impacted  by  £1.7m  of  higher  than  anticipated  electricity 
costs.

The  Group  operates  out  of  eight  of  its  own  data  centres 
and has a large (including management) presence in a third-
party data centre. In seven out of nine of these data centres, 
the Group is responsible for the sourcing of electricity. The 
electricity  purchasing  cost  differences  between  the  data 
centres are detailed below: 

• 

  In  the  seven  data  centres  where  procurement  is 
managed by the Group own-use commodity contracts 
have  been  agreed  for  the  whole  of  FY24  and  a  large 
proportion of FY25. The commodity rates achieved are 
consistent  with  the  Board’s  expectations  and  removes 
the  commodity  price  risk  in  these  data  centres  until  
1 April 2024.  

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Chief Executive’s Review (continued)

• 

The  two  data  centres  where  the  Group  has  no  control 
on  the  procurement  of  electricity  have  also  locked  in 
forward  prices  but  at  rates  much  higher  (c.80%)  than 
those  achieved  by  the  Group.    Whilst  we  can  pass 
on  price  increases  to  the  former  Redcentric,  Piksel 
and  4D  customer  bases,  the  fixed  priced  Sungard 
customer  contracts  mean  that  for  FY24  there  will  be 
£0.9m of increased costs which cannot be passed on to 
customers. One of these two data centres will be closed 
by the end of FY24.

Following  the  year  end  we  have  continued  to  monitor 
the  forward  rates  for  FY25  and  beyond  and  have  taken 
advantage  of  further  reductions  in  the  energy  market  by 
agreeing additional own-use commodity contracts for a large 
proportion of our electricity requirements for FY25.

Following  the  Sungard  DC  acquisition,  electricity  costs  have 
become our largest externally sourced cost item, and in addition 
to monitoring and reducing price risk we have put considerable 
effort in to reducing electricity consumption, not only to reduce 
costs  but  also  significantly  reducing  our  carbon  footprint  and 
contributing towards our net zero strategy.  

The  introduction  of  cold  aisle  containment  together  with 
some  basic  housekeeping  measures  has  already  reduced 
consumption within the Heathrow and Woking data centres 
by  a  very  impressive  16%.  Whilst  this  is  an  excellent  start, 
further  measures  including  the  replacement  of  inefficient 
water  chillers  in  Heathrow  will  be  progressed  in  FY24 
accelerating the reduction in consumption significantly.   

We are pleased to announce the following results for FY23:

• 

Revenues of £141.7m (FY22: £93.3m);

•  Adjusted EBITDA* of £24.5m (FY22: £23.7m);

•  Adjusted operating profit^ of £8.6m (FY22: £15.9m);

• 

Reported operating loss of £8.9m (FY22: profit of £6.6m);

The net debt position is after dividend payments of £5.6m; 
the  acquisitions  of  Sungard  Consulting  and  DCs,  and  4D 
Data Centres for a combined cash cost of £26.6m (net of cash 
acquired);  exceptional  items  largely  relating  to  integration 
and  restructuring  costs  of  £8.1m;  capital  expenditure  of 
£6.8m;  and  a  working  capital  deficit  due  to  investment  in 
stock of £1.4m.

from 

reflect 

results 

the  contribution 

These 
the  five 
acquisitions  completed  over  the  last  two  financial  years 
including  a  full  year  of  trading  from  Piksel  and  7  Elements, 
and a partial year’s contribution from 4D Data Centres and 
the two Sungard business and asset acquisitions. The results 
further reflect the following: 

•  Higher  than  anticipated  electricity  costs  of  £1.7m, 
reflecting  the  impact  of  the  Government  Energy  Bill 
Relief Scheme not being applied to overall consumption, 
the significant increase in non-commodity charges and 
rephasing  of  energy  efficiency  savings  as  a  result  of 
supplier equipment delays. 

•  Higher  than  expected  software  license  costs  of  £0.7m 
(annualised effect of £1.5m) as a result of the acquired 
Sungard  business  not 
recording  platform  usage 
accurately  and  under  reporting  license  consumption 
prior to the acquisition.

OTHER UPDATES

Inflation

The business continues to experience widespread inflationary 
increases  across  its  cost  base,  primarily  wage  inflation, 
electricity costs and software license costs. Furthermore, we 
have been notified of significant increases in business rates 
(c.33%) across our data centre portfolio which is anticipated 
to add c.£0.8m to the FY24 cost base. Although the business 
can pass on specific increases relating to electricity (with the 
exception of the Sungard customer base) and license costs 
periodically,  increases  relating  to  general  inflation  can  only 
be passed on annually.

•  Net debt as at 31 March 2023 of £73.0m (31 March 2022: 

Contingent consideration

As part of the deal structure for the acquisition of 7 Elements 
Ltd, contingent consideration of up to £0.45m was included 
based on the performance of the business in the 13 months to 
31 March 2023. As the acquisition has exceeded the targets 
set, the maximum amount of £0.45m became payable, and 
was paid on 3 April 2023.

net debt of £16.6m); and

•  Adjusted  net  debt  as  at  31  March  2023  of  £35.6m  (31 

March 2022: net debt of £1.5m);

*Adjusted  EBITDA  is  EBITDA  excluding  exceptional  items,  share-based 
payments  and  associated  National  Insurance.  Exceptional  items  are 
outlines in note 9.

^Adjusted  operating  profit  is  reported  operating  profit  excluding 
amortisation  of  intangible  assets  arising  on  business  combinations, 

exceptional items and share-based payments. 

9

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportChief Executive’s Review (continued)

Contingent consideration (continued)

The  final  consideration  for  the  Sungard  DCs  acquisition 
is  based  on  the  conversion  of  short-term  contracts  into 
contracts  with  a  term  of  12  months  or  more  from  the  date 
of the acquisition. The fair value at the yearend was £2.75m 
(undiscounted), based on the expectations at that point. The 
final  position  has  now  been  fully  crystallised  resulting  in  a 
payment of £0.4m made in July 2023. The lower payment is 
the result of a revised position of customer contracts at the 
anniversary date.

OUTLOOK 

Electricity  costs  remain  key  to  financial  performance  and 
we  will  continue  to  make  significant  investments  in  FY24  to 
further reduce electricity consumption. This will be achieved 
by  deploying  new  cooling  infrastructure  at  our  flagship  data 
centre  in  Heathrow.  The  Company  has  locked  in  electricity 
prices for the majority of FY24 and a large proportion of FY25, 
and  so  will  not  be  materially  subject  to  further  commodity 
price volatility in the following two financial years.

With  both  the  synergy  and  energy  efficiency  programmes 
completing during the course of FY24, FY25 will be the first 
full year that reflects the full benefit of the acquisitions. 

the 

improved 

electricity 

purchasing 
Considering 
arrangements,  customer  and  supplier  price 
increases 
effective from 1 April 2023 and completed cost reductions as 
a result of the synergy programme, we commence FY24 with 
annualised revenues and adjusted EBITDA of c.£160.0m and 
c.£29.0m respectively. 

Peter Brotherton  
Chief Executive Officer  
24 August 2023

The  focus  for  FY24  will  be  to  complete  the  integration  of 
the  recently  acquired  businesses  and  to  continue  to  grow 
the  business  by  capitalising  on  the  excellent  opportunities 
provided  by  the  broader  product  offerings  and  increased 
customer  bases  which  have  resulted  from  the  acquisitions 
undertaken in FY22 and FY23.  

10
10

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023O U R   S E R V I C E   P O R T F O L I O

Cyber security

Scanning & 
remediation

Identity & access 
management solutions

Security testing

Managed vulnerability 
scanning

Data loss prevention

Incident response 

Cloud data protection

Managed perimeter 
security service 

Application firewalls 

Endpoint security 
management

Security monitoring  
& analytics

Information security 
management  
as a service

Information security 
policy development

Certificate 
management

Security Information 
Event Management 
(SIEM)

Resilience consulting 
services

Managed firewalls

DDoS mitigation

Cloud 

Connectivity

Communications

SD-WAN 

Managed WAN

Managed LAN

Network 
connectivity 
options

Secure remote 
access

Internet access

HSCN 
connectivity

Public cloud 
connectivity  
(Azure & AWS)

Managed 
wireless 
networking

Cellular MPLS 
primary & 
failover

WAN Insight

Hosted 
telephony

Unified 
communications

Microsoft Teams

Webex Teams

Microsoft  
Teams calling

Call recording 
& Voice AI

Call reporting

Calls & lines

SIP trunks

CallConnect GP

PCI Comply

Keep my 
place in the 
queue / ARC

Omnichannel 
contact centre

Digital 
transformation 
consultancy

Modern 
workplace

Colocation 

Managed  
public cloud  
(Azure & AWS)

Infrastructure 
as a service

Hybrid cloud

Disaster recovery 
as a service

Virtual desktops

Full stack 
managed service

 OS Level 
managed service

E-commerce 
(DC2) & SAP 
Hybris

Application 
modernisation

Cloud migration 
& consultancy

Application 
services experts

Backup as 
a service

Database 
administration

Platform as 
a service 

AI & machine 
learning

LAN infrastructure

On-premises security

Telephony 
infrastructure

On-premises Wi-Fi

IT consultancy services

Implementation 
services

Maintenance & 
support services

 Applications & 
software sales

Microsoft operating 
systems

Hardware – switches, 
routers, servers, 
PCs & laptops

Microsoft licensing & 
licence optimisation

Product and software sales

11

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportFinancial Review 

Financial performance measures

Total revenue

Recurring revenue 1

Recurring revenue percentage1

Adjusted EBITDA1

Adjusted operating profit 1

Reported operating (loss)/profit

Adjusted cash generated from operations1

Reported cash generated from operations

Net debt1

Adjusted net debt1

Adjusted basic earnings per share1

Reported basic (loss)/earnings per share

Year ended 
31 March 2023  
(FY23)

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
(FY22) 

£141.7m  

£128.5m  

90.7%

£24.5m  

£8.6m  

(£8.9m) 

£23.1m  

£14.8m  

(£73.0m)

(£35.6m)

2.66p  

(5.94p) 

Change 

51.8%

54.8%

1.8%

3.3%

(45.6%)

(235.3%)

19.6%

(13.8%) 

(339.5%)

(2,271.8%)

£93.3m 

£83.0m  

88.9%

£23.7m 

£15.9m 

£6.6m 

£19.3m 

£17.2m 

(£16.6m)

(£1.5m)

7.68p 

4.43p 

(65.3%)

(231.4%)

Percentage changes calculated on absolute values. 

1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 20. 

Overview

The results for FY23 have been dominated by the impact of the five acquisitions made since September 2021, and reflect the 
first full year of conditions from the acquired Piksel and 7 Elements businesses, and a partial year of contributions from the 
acquired Sungard Consulting, Sungard DC and 4D businesses. The enlarged Group delivered revenue and adjusted EBITDA 
of  £141.7m,  and  £24.5m  respectively,  resulting  in  51.8%  and  3.3%  of  respective  growth.  Adjusted  net  debt  has  increased 
to  £35.6m  reflecting  £26.6m  of  acquisition  consideration,  in  addition  to  £8.1m  of  exceptional  costs  largely  relating  to  the 
restructuring and integration programmes following the acquisitions. Key considerations in the financial statements include:

1.  On 26 April 2022, the Group completed a refinance of its debt facilities that were due to mature on 30 June 2022. The new 
debt facilities consist of an £80m revolving credit facility (“RCF”), £7m asset financing facility and a £20m uncommitted 
accordion facility and are provided by a new four bank group consisting of NatWest, Barclays, Bank of Ireland, and Silicon 
Valley  Bank  (now  under  the  HSBC  group)  (the  “New  Facility”),  with  the  asset  financing  facility  provided  by  Lombard. 
The New Facility has an initial maturity date of 26 April 2025 with options to extend by a further one or two years. The 
borrowing cost of the RCF is determined by the level of the Company leverage and has a borrowing cost of 205 basis 
points over SONIA at the Company’s yearend leverage levels. An arrangement fee of 75 basis points was payable upfront, 
in addition to a commitment fee on the undrawn portion of the new RCF, on equivalent terms to the previous facility. The 
New Facility provides the Group with additional liquidity to be used for working capital purposes and to fund acquisitions.

12
12

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Financial Review (continued)

2.  The acquisition on 7 June 2022 by the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited of the consulting business 
from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for £4.2m consideration paid in cash.  The business 
provides  services  in  respect  of  business  continuity,  cloud  and  infrastructure,  cyber  resilience,  disaster  recovery  and 
hybrid cloud transformation services alongside the provision and operation of Cloud related services. This acquisition is 
considered to be a linked transaction with the DC acquisition as mentioned in note 4 below, and also refer to note 2.1 for 
further consideration of the accounting treatment. 

3.  The acquisition on 27 June 2022 by Redcentric Solutions Limited for 100% of the share capital of 4D Data Centres Limited 
(“4D”) for £10.1m consideration paid in cash.  The business provides colocation, cloud and connectivity services to mid-
market customers. The primary purpose of the business combination is to scale the Group’s existing revenues in this area 
with significant synergies expected as the acquisition is integrated into the Group. On 28 February 2023, the trade, assets 
and liabilities of 4D were hived in to Redcentric Solutions Limited. 

4.  The  acquisition  on  6  July  2022  by  Redcentric  Solutions  Limited  for  certain  business  and  assets  relating  to  three  data 
centres “DCs” from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for initial consideration of £10.1m paid in 
cash and a cash prepayment of £3.4m, with contingent consideration at a maximum potential value of £19.0m depending 
on customer retention and certain performance criteria in the 12-month period post-acquisition. 

The key financial highlights are as follows:

• 

Total revenue growth of 51.8% to £141.7m (FY22: £93.3m).

• 

Recurring revenue grew by 54.8% to £128.5m, with recurring revenue representing 90.7% of the total revenue (FY22: 
£83.0m / 88.9%).

•  Gross profit has increased by 69.5% to £100.9m.

•  Adjusted EBITDA of £24.5m is 3.3% ahead of FY22.

•  Adjusted operating profit decreased by £7.3m to £8.6m (45.6% decrease).

•  Adjusted net debt as at 31 March 2023 was £35.6m, excluding £36.9m of IFRS16 lease liabilities that were previously 

classified as operating leases under IAS17 and £0.5m of supplier loans. 

• 

Reported operating profit reduced by £15.5m to a loss of £8.9m.

LTC

New Redcentric data centre facilities at London Technology Centre

13

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportFinancial Review (continued)

Revenue

Revenue for FY23 was generated wholly from the UK and is analysed as follows:

Recurring revenue 1

Product revenue

Services revenue

Total revenue

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

Change  
£000

Change  
%

128,461

7,144

6,069

141,674  

 82,965   

 6,187 

 4,176 

93,328 

45,496

957

1,893

48,346

54.8%

15.5%

45.3%

51.8%

1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 14.

Total revenue increased by £48.3m compared to FY22, impacted by: incremental revenue in FY23 generated by the acquisitions 
of Sungard DCs, 4D and Sungard consultancy, and the first full year of revenue generated from FY22 acquisitions in Piksel and 
7 Elements. 

Revenue is analysed into the following categories:

• 

Recurring revenue has increased 54.8% to £128.5m (FY22: £83.0m) from new contracts with Sungard DCs and 4D.

•  Non-recurring product revenue has increased £0.9m to £7.1m (FY22: £6.2m) from sales with customers introduced through 

the current year acquisitions. 

•  Non-recurring services revenue increased to £6.1m (FY22: £4.2m), reflecting increased activity on new projects.

Gross profit

Gross Profit

Gross Margin

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

Change  
£000

Change  
%

100,911 

71.2%

 59,550 

63.8%

41,361

N/A

69.5%

N/A

Gross profit increased by 69.5% (£41.4m) reflecting the Group’s increased revenue and contribution from higher margin 4D 
and Sungard Consulting acquisitions.

14

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Financial Review (continued)

Adjusted operating costs1

The Group’s adjusted operating costs (operating expenditure excluding depreciation, amortisation, exceptional items, other 

operating income and share-based payments) are set out in the table below:

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

Change  
£’000

Change  
%

UK employee costs

Office and data centre costs

Network and equipment costs

Other sales, general and administration costs

Offshore costs

Total adjusted operating costs

34,482

25,335

11,824

3,364

1,414

76,419  

 21,369 

 4,411 

 7,299 

1,553 

 1,205 

35,837  

13,113

20,924 

4,525 

1,811 

209

40,582

61.4%

474.3%

62.0%

116.6%

17.3%

113.2%

1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 20.

Total adjusted operating costs for FY23 were 113.2% (£40.6m) higher than prior year, reflecting: 

• 

employee costs increased £13.1m (61.4%) due to additional employees following the Sungard and 4D acquisitions;

• 

• 

office and data centre costs increased by £20.9m, primarily due to the impact of increased electricity costs as several 
electricity supply contract renewals fell due during the UK energy crisis, and the increase in the number of data centres 
through acquisitions; and

network and equipment costs increased by £4.5m, and other sales, general and administration costs are up £1.8m, both 
due to increased requirements from acquisitions.

Employees

Year-end headcount

UK

India

Total employees

Average headcount

UK

India

Total employees

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
(Number)

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
(Number) 

Variance 
(Number) 

540 

98  

638

376

91

467

164

7

171

Year ended 
31 March 2023  
(Number)

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
(Number) 

Variance 
(Number) 

491 

97  

588

386

100

486

105

(3)

102

15

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportFinancial Review (continued)

Adjusted EBITDA1 

Adjusted EBITDA is EBITDA excluding exceptional items (as set out in note 9), share-based payments and associated National 

Insurance. The same adjustments are also made in determining the adjusted EBITDA margin.

Reported operating (loss)/profit

Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations

Amortisation of other intangible assets

Depreciation on tangible assets

Depreciation on ROU assets

EBITDA

Exceptional items:

Acquisition fees

Integration costs

Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute

Cloud computing costs

Share-based payments and associated National Insurance

Adjusted EBITDA1

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(8,939)

8,183

590 

4,636

10,617

15,087  

8,149

695

5,965

809

680

1,256

24,492

 6,607 

 6,498 

 475 

 2,745 

 4,578 

20,903  

1,629

1,181

23,713

1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 20.

•  Adjusted EBITDA increased by 3.3% to £24.5m, £0.8m higher than prior year.  FY23 includes 9 months of contributions 

from the Sungard and 4D acquisitions, as well as the first full year of Piksel and 7 Elements.

Taxation, interest and dividend

The  tax  charge  for  the  year  was  a  credit  of  £3.2m  (FY22:  a  credit  of  £1.4m),  comprising  an  income  tax  charge  of  £0.1m  
(FY22: a charge of £0.4m), and a deferred tax credit of £3.3m (FY22: a credit of £1.8m).

Net finance costs for the year were £3.5m (FY22: £1.1m), including £1.2m (FY22: £1.0m) of interest payable on leases of which 
£1.2m (FY22: £0.8m) related to leases previously recognised as operating leases under IAS17. 

During  the  year,  the  Group  paid  an  interim  dividend  for  FY23  of  1.2p  per  share,  totalling  £1.9m  as  detailed  in  note  14  
(FY22: 1.2p per share).

A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share is expected to be paid on 19 January 2024, subject to approval at the Company’s 
AGM,  to  shareholders  on  the  register  at  the  close  of  business  on  8  December  2023  with  shares  going  ex-dividend  on  7 
December 2023. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 27 December 2023.  

16
16

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Financial Review (continued)

Net debt

During the year, net debt increased from £16.6m to £73.0m as at 31 March 2023, with the movements shown in the tables below:

Operating (loss)/profit

Depreciation and amortisation

Exceptional items

Share based payments

Adjusted EBITDA1

Working capital movements

Transfer from intangible assets to cost of sales

Non-cash provision movements

Adjusted cash generated from operations

Cash conversion

Capital expenditure - cash purchases

Capital expenditure - finance lease purchases

Proceeds from sale of fixed asset - sale and leaseback

Net capital expenditure

Corporation tax (paid) / received

Interest paid

Loan arrangement fees/fee amortisation

Finance lease/term loan interest

Effect of exchange rates

Other movements in net debt

Normalised net debt movement1

Cash cost of exceptional items

Share buyback

Non-capitalised finance leases purchases

Acquisition of subsidiaries (net of cash acquired)

Cash received on disposal of non-core business unit

IFRS 16 lease additions

IFRS 16 lease additions on acquisition 

IFRS 16 lease disposals

Remeasurement relating to lease modification

Dividends

Disposal of treasury shares on exercise of share options

Cash received on exercise of share options

Share issues

Increase in net debt

Net debt at the beginning of the period

Net debt at the end of the period

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(8,939)

24,026

8,149

1,256

24,492 

(1,410)

-

-

23,082

94.2% 

(6,374)

-

966

(5,408)

(670)

(1,795)

(291)

(1,248)

(101)

(4,105)

13,569

(8,258)

-

-

(26,606)

-

(28,314)

(1,976)

-

629

(5,593)

229

-

-

(69,889)

(56,320)

(16,645)

(72,965)

6,607

14,296

1,629

1,181

 23,713 

(4,017)

140

(577)

19,259

 81.2% 

(2,765)

(438)

-

(3,203)

246 

(51)

-

(885)

27 

(663)

15,393

(2,091) 

(2,666)

(145)

(10,422)

5,750

(2,094)

-

813

-

(5,627)

-

12

1

(16,469) 

(1,076)

(15,569)

(16,645) 

1 For an explanation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 20. Exceptional items are outlines in note 9.

17

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportFinancial Review (continued)

As at  
31 March 
2021

Net cash 
flow

Net non-
cash flow

As at  
31 March 
2022

Net cash 
flow 

Net non-
cash flow

As at  
31 March 
2023 

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Cash

RCF

Term Loan

Lease Liabilities

5,250

(3,473)

-

(1,491)

(19,328)

(15,569) 

-

532

3,701

760

27

-

(45)

(1,818)

(1,836)

1,804

(335)

(103)

1,366

-

(31,537)

(2,094)

(33,631)

(1,004)

(17,445)

(16,645) 

532

(21,542)

(52,882)

(24)

(1,217)

(3,438)

(496)

(40,204)

(72,965)

Included in lease liabilities at 31 March 2023 are £36.9m (FY22: £14.1m) of IFRS 16 lease liabilities that were previously classified 
as operating leases under IAS17 and £0.5m (FY22: £1.0m) of term loans. Other movements reflect acquisition of subsidiaries 
of £26.6m, capital expenditure of £6.8m and £5.6m on dividends.

Trade receivables and payables

In the year, focus remained on maintaining a strong ageing profile with a low level of aged debt. At the year-end, 96% of gross 

trade debt was current or less than 30 days overdue (FY22: 97%). 

Current

1 to 30 days overdue

31 to 60 days overdue

61 to 90 days overdue

91 to 180 days overdue

> 180 days overdue

Gross trade debtors

Provisions

Net trade debtors

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

18,450

2,212 

557

283

194 

(240)

21,456

(1,251)

20,205

 8,736 

 1,997 

 452 

 80 

 19 

(172) 

 11,112 

 (884)

10,228 

Trade debtor days were 46 at 31 March 2023 compared to 36 at 31 March 2022. Trade debtor days are calculated as gross 
trade debtors divided by revenue (incl. VAT) multiplied by 365.

Trade payable days were 42 at 31 March 2023 compared to 37 as at 31 March 2022. Trade payable days are calculated as trade 

payables divided by total purchases (cost of sales and operating expenditure) multiplied by 365.

18
18

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Financial Review (continued)

Financing

In the year, focus remained on maintaining a strong ageing profile with a low level of aged debt. At the year-end, 96% of 

debt was current or less than 30 days overdue (FY22: 97%). 

31 March 2023

31 March 2022

Available

Drawn

Undrawn

Available 

£000

£000

£000

£000

Drawn

£000

Undrawn 

£000

Committed

- Revolving credit facility

80,000

34,000

46,000

- Term Loans

- Leases

- Asset financing facility

496

40,204

7,000

127,700

496

40,204

2,309

77,009

-

-

4,691

50,691

5,000

1,004

17,445

7,000

30,449

-

5,000

1,004

17,445

1,100

19,549

-

-

5,900

10,900

Uncommitted

- Bank overdraft

- Accordion facility

-

20,000

20,000

-

-

-

-

20,000

20,000

-

20,000

20,000

-

-

-

-

20,000

20,000

Total borrowing facilities

147,700

77,009

70,691

50,449

19,549

30,900

Uncommitted facilities represent facilities available to the Group, but which can be withdrawn by the lender and hence are not 
within the Group’s control. 

As  at  31  March  2023,  the  Group  was  party  to  £87m  of  banking  facilities,  comprising  a  Revolving  Credit  Facility  of  £80m  
(net £34m utilised at 31 March 2023) and a £7.0m Asset Financing Facility (£2.3m utilised at 31 March 2023). As at 31 March 
2023, these facilities are due to expire on 25 April 2025.

The borrowing cost of the RCF is determined by the Group’s leverage and has a borrowing cost of 205 basis points over SONIA 
at the Group’s current leverage levels.  A commitment fee is payable on the undrawn portion of the RCF at 82 basis points, 
being 40% of the borrowing cost. 

David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer 
24 August 2023

19

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportAlternative Performance Measures

This Annual Report and Accounts contains certain financial measures that are not defined or recognised under IFRS but are 
presented to provide readers with additional financial information that is evaluated by management and investors in assessing 
the performance of the Group. 

This additional information presented is not uniformly defined by all companies and may not be comparable with similarly 
titled measures and disclosures by other companies. These measures are unaudited and should not be viewed in isolation or 
as an alternative to those measures that are derived in accordance with IFRS.

Recurring revenue

Recurring  revenue  is  the  revenue  that  annually  repeats  either  under  contractual  arrangement  or  by  predictable  customer 
habit. It highlights how much of the Group’s total revenue is secured and anticipated to repeat in future periods, providing a 
measure of the financial strength of the business. It is a measure that is well understood by the Group’s investor and analyst 
community and is used for internal performance reporting.

Reported revenue

Non-recurring revenue

Recurring revenue

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

141,674

(13,213)

128,461

 93,328 

(10,363)

82,965 

Recurring revenue percentage is the percentage of recurring revenue as a proportion of total revenue.

Recurring revenue makes up 91% of total revenue in FY23, an increase of 1.8ppts from prior year (89%).

Maintenance capital expenditure

Maintenance capital expenditure is the capital expenditure that is incurred in support of the Group’s underlying infrastructure 
rather than in support of specific customer contracts. This metric shows the level of internal investment the Group is making 
through capital expenditure. As the measure explains and analyses routine capital expenditure, land and buildings (including 
any associated assets relating to dilapidation provisions) and sale and lease back additions are excluded due to the infrequency 
of this expenditure occurring.  Customer capital expenditure relates to assets utilised by the Group in delivering managed 

services to our customers. 

-  Property plant and equipment additions – excluding additions on acquisition (note 16)

- Intangible additions – excluding additions on acquisition (note 15)

-  Right of use asset additions – excluding land and buildings and sale and leasebacks 

(note 17)

Reported capital expenditure incurred

Customer capital expenditure incurred (notes 15 & 16)

Maintenance capital expenditure incurred

Year ended 
31 March 
2023  
£000

Year ended 
31 March  
2022  
£000

5,505 

869

391  

6,765  

(3,234)

3,531

 2,264 

 502 

 460 

 3,226 

(1,076)

2,150

Reported capital expenditure of £6.8m has increased by £3.5m (FY22: £3.2m) driven by additions to PPE for efficiency measures 
in the data centres. Customer capital expenditure has increased to £3.2m (FY22: £1.1m) to support revenue growth. We will 
continue to monitor the Group’s capital requirements and invest in the business when appropriate.  

20
20

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Alternative Performance Measures (continued)

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA 

Adjusted EBITDA is EBITDA excluding exceptional items (as set out in note 9), share-based payments and associated National 
Insurance.  The  same  adjustments  are  also  made  in  determining  the  adjusted  EBITDA  margin.  Items  are  only  classified  as 
exceptional due to their nature or size.

The Board considers that this metric provides a useful measure of assessing trading performance of the Group as it excludes 
items which impact financial performance such as exceptional costs and the amortisation of acquired intangibles arising from 
business combinations which varies year on year dependent on the timing and size of any acquisitions.

Reported operating (loss)/profit

Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations

Amortisation of other intangible assets

Depreciation on tangible assets

Depreciation on ROU assets

EBITDA

Exceptional items: 

Acquisition fees

Integration costs

Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute

Cloud computing costs

Share-based payments and associated National Insurance

Adjusted EBITDA

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(8,939)  

8,183

590  

4,636  

10,617  

15,087  

8,149 

695

5,965

809

680

1,256 

24,492  

 6,607 

 6,498 

 475 

 2,745 

 4,578 

 20,903 

1,629 

1,181 

23,713 

Adjusted EBITDA increased to £24.5m, £0.8m higher than prior year, with adjusted EBITDA margin of 17.3% (down from 25.4%). 

Adjusted operating profit

Adjusted operating profit is operating profit excluding amortisation on acquired intangibles, exceptional items and share-
based payments. The same adjustments are also made in determining the adjusted operating profit margin and in determining 

adjusted earnings per share (“EPS”).   

Reported operating (loss)/profit

Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations

Exceptional items

Share-based payments

Adjusted operating profit

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(8,939)  

8,183  

8,149 

1,256 

8,649  

 6,607 

 6,498 

1,629 

1,181 

15,915  

The EPS calculation further adjusts for the tax impact of the operating profit adjustments, presented in note 13. This metric is 
used within the Group’s dividend policy and is therefore relevant for our shareholders. Share based payments are removed for 

adjusted operating profit as they are not reflective of trading.

21

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportAlternative Performance Measures (continued)

Adjusted operating costs

Adjusted  operating  costs  are  operating  costs  less  depreciation,  amortisation,  exceptional  items,  share-based  payments 
and foreign exchange. This metric shows the trading operating expenditure of the Group, excluding non-trading and non-
recurring items which impact financial performance. These are controllable operating costs which provide investors with useful 

information about how the Group is managing its expenditure. 

Reported operating expenditure

Depreciation ROU assets

Depreciation of tangible assets

Amortisation of intangibles arising on business combinations

Amortisation of other intangible assets

Exceptional items

Other operating income

Share-based payments

Adjusted operating expenditure

Adjusted cash generated from operations

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

 109,938 

(10,617)

(4,636)

(8,183)

(590)

(8,149)

(88)

(1,256)

76,419  

 53,046 

(4,578)

(2,745)

(6,498)

(475)

(1,629)

(103)

(1,181)

35,837 

Adjusted  cash  generated  from  operations  is  reported  cash  generated  from  operations  plus  the  cash  cost  of  exceptional 
items. As the Group has been involved in acquisitions and has had other significant, non-repeatable cash impacting items, 
this measure allows investors to see the cash generated from operations excluding these items which are one-off by nature 
therefore will not repeat in future years. 

Reported cash generated from operations

Cash costs of exceptional items

Adjusted cash generated from operations

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

14,824  

8,258

23,082

 17,168 

2,091 

19,259

22
22

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Alternative Performance Measures (continued)

Adjusted net (debt)/cash

Adjusted net cash/debt is reported net debt (borrowings net of cash) less supplier loans and less lease liabilities that would 
have been classified as operating leases under IAS17 and is a measure reviewed by the Group’s banking syndicate as part of 
covenant compliance as detailed in note 24. 

Reported net debt

Term loans

Lease liabilities that would have been classified as operating leases under IAS 17

Adjusted net (debt)/cash

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(72,965)

495

36,891

(35,579)

(16,645)

1,004 

14,096

(1,545)

Normalised net debt movement

The normalised net debt movement, as summarised in the net debt table on page 11, details the movement in net debt before 
one-off (exceptional) amounts and is therefore a useful indicator to the potential movement in net debt in FY23.

David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer 
24 August 2023

O U R   A I M   I S   T O   B E   A   T R U S T E D   PA R T N E R   T O   A L L   O U R   C U S T O M E R S

23

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic report“ We were looking for a 

like-for-like service, but got a lot 
more for less: fully managed IaaS 
with Disaster Recovery, cloud 
backup and support we can rely 
on. Migration to Redcentric’s 
IaaS platform was completed in 
just four weeks. The team were 

absolutely amazing!”

24

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Strategy and Business Model

The market for IT managed services in the UK is highly fragmented and is served by a broad spectrum of businesses from global 
telecommunication  companies  through  hardware  and  software  providers,  system  integrators  and  a  range  of  independent 
managed service providers of varying sizes, through to companies providing individual elements of the IT managed services 
spectrum. 

The  Group  provides  a  broad  range  of  managed  services  across  its  three  core  specialist  areas  of  Cloud,  Connectivity  and 
Communications, and has formed a divisional structure to ensure each area has dedicated focus with appropriately skilled 
resource.  To  complete  our  product  offering,  the  Group  acquired  a  cyber  security  business  (7  Elements)  and  is  building 
additional cyber security capabilities into its product portfolio.

The  Group  positions  itself  in  the  market  as  being  able  to  combine  the  benefits  of  proprietary  network  and  data  centres 
with a flexible and technically skilled workforce able to deliver and support critical services and solutions in a highly secure 
environment.

The Group seeks to differentiate itself in three distinct ways: 

• 

Innovation – innovation in the design and delivery of services; 

• 

Reliability – the right technical skills, organised in the right way, to give predictable high-quality results; and 

• 

Value – service offerings that are designed to offer value for money to mid-market customers. 

Through these differentiators, the Group aims to attract new customers and to deepen and broaden its relationships with 
existing customers. 

The Board’s strategy for growth comprises:

• 

identify acquisition opportunities for both scale and capability; 

• 

• 

ongoing investment in expanding and enhancing the Group’s own infrastructure so that it can provide its customers with 
the very highest levels of security and service; and

effective  use  of  the  Group’s  scale  and  resources  to  explore  and  invest  in  new  technologies  so  that  its  customers  can 
benefit from the high levels of innovation across the whole industry.

The  Board  believes  that  the  Group’s  position  between  the  very  large  system  integrators  and  network  operators  and  the 
smaller competitors (that may lack delivery structure, reputation, reliability and financial strength) is a very compelling one. 
The Group has a strong and reliable set of core infrastructure and has developed a delivery model that provides assurance 
and certainty for customers.

25

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSection 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders

The Board recognises its duty to consider the needs and concerns of the Group’s key 

stakeholders during its discussions and decision-making. The Board has had regard to 

the importance of fostering relationships with its stakeholders as set out below and 

also detailed in the Strategic Report and Corporate Governance Report of this Report. 

More information on how the Directors have discharged their duties under section 172 

of the Companies Act 2006 is also available in the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 27 

and Corporate Governance Report on pages 43 to 50.  

•  Colleague  support  -  we  have  continued  to  focus  on 
colleague well-being and have run a number of initiatives 
to ensure our colleagues are kept engaged, supported 
and  connected  to  the  business.    We  have  appointed 
and  trained  a  group  of  mental  health  ambassadors 
and  carried  out  a  number  of  mental  health  awareness 
activities,  including  holding  webinars  or  topics  such  as 
managing stress and positive thinking, office lunchtime 
walks,  complimentary  on-site  massages  by  qualified 
therapists,  regular  circulation  of  well-being  tips  and 
offering resilience building courses. To assist colleagues 
with their physical well-being, we have run a number of 
programmes  focusing  on  health,  fitness  and  diet  and 
also offer support on health costs. Recognising the need 
to support colleagues’ financial well-being, we have run 
a  mortgage  surgery  where  colleagues  have  access  to 
qualified mortgage advisers to discuss mortgage needs 
and issues in confidence. In addition, for the first time, 
the  Group  held  a  number  of  menopause  awareness 
events, for both female and male colleagues.

• 

• 

• 

Electric car scheme – the Group has introduced a new 
electric  car  scheme  for  colleagues,  in  conjunction  with 
a  third-party  scheme  provider,  enabling  colleagues  to 
use  salary  sacrifice  and  make  considerable  savings  on 
the purchase of an electric car. 

Share  schemes  –  the  Company  has  in  place  an  HMRC 
approved  Save-As-You-Earn  option  plan  (“SAYE”)  to 
invested 
enable  colleagues  to  become  personally 
as  shareholders  of  the  Group.  The  Company  invites 
participation on an annual basis.

is 

included 

information 

in  the  Corporate 
Further 
Responsibility  section  of  this  Report  on  pages  23  to  
26  and  in  the  Corporate  Governance  Report  on  pages 
43 to 63.

Colleagues

•  Colleague  briefings  –  monthly  colleague  briefing 
sessions  are  held  with  the  operating  board  of  the 
Company (“Operating Board”) to enable colleagues to 
ask questions and raise issues, and for colleagues to be 
provided with updates on the business. 

• 

• 

• 

Performance  updates  –  key  performance  information 
such as trading updates and financial results are always 
promptly  communicated  to  colleagues  by  group  wide 
internal  emails  and  follow  up  all  colleague  calls.  There 
are  also  a  number  of  communications  champions 
across  the  business  who  meet  monthly  to  ensure  the 
Company’s  commitment  to  two-way  communication 
with  colleagues  is  met  and  continually  enhance  and 
develop its communications strategy. 

Engagement survey - We have finalised the action plan 
following the last colleague survey, ahead of the launch 
of a further all colleague survey to ensure that the views 
of  the  enlarged  business  and  all  colleagues  that  have 
joined through recent acquisitions are captured.  

Learning management – we have continued to enhance 
our  online  learning  management  system  over  the 
last  twelve  months,  introducing  additional  learning 
content.  In  addition,  we  have  launched  a  partnership 
with  LinkedIn  Learning  through  which  colleagues  have 
exclusive access to tools to support their personal and 
professional development.  

•  Colleague  recognition  –  we  continue  to  recognise  the 
Company’s core values through our recognition scheme 
– the Extra Mile Awards and also have weekly recognition 
of exceptional performance of colleagues.

26
26

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Section 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders (continued)

Customers 

•  Customer  surveys  -  a  biannual  net  promoter  score 
(“NPS”) survey is carried out to gain customer feedback 
and  test  customers’  opinions  on  service  experience.  
There  is  also  a  monthly  NPS  survey  programme  run 
by  the  Company’s  service  delivery  management  team 
to  customers  directly  following  a  service  review  –  this 
ensures a high return rate and continuous feedback from 
our customers continually.   The results of the monthly 
and  biannual  survey  scores  are  discussed  in  monthly 
service  improvement  meetings  with  all  department 
heads,  in  order  that  any  trends  and  areas  of  focus  can 
be addressed.

•  Monthly and quarterly service reviews – regular service 
reviews are held with customers, led by service delivery 
managers and account managers, with a focus on service 
experience and further support customers may require.

•  Daily  social  media  updates  –  the  Group’s  social  media 
presence  and  activity  has  continued  to  increase  and 
improve  during  the  year.  At  least  daily  updates  are 
provided  through  the  Company’s  corporate  social 
media  channels  (LinkedIn,  Twitter  and  Facebook)  and 
contain key updates and customer case studies. These 
are shared by customer facing employees to ensure as 
wide a reach as possible to keep customers appraised of 
the Company’s news and offering. 

•  Customer scoring – within the Group’s support systems, 
the Group reaches out to customers on an ongoing basis 
to  score  the  support  service  they  have  received,  with 
follow up actions taken by the support team based on 
each customer’s score and requirements.

•  Customer  service  management  solution  –  during  the 
year,  the  Group  completed  the  launch  of  Phase  2  of 
its  new  service  management  solution  for  customers, 
called  SMAX,  which  replaced  HP  service  manager 
and  Phase  1  of  which  was  launched  in  2022.  SMAX 
has  continued  to  enable  the  Group  to  improve  how 
customers are supported, through its a customer facing 
portal.  All  customers  acquired  from  4D  and  Sungard 
have  been  migrated  onto  SMAX,  to  ensure  that  all 
customers  are  supported  from  the  same  platform  and 
a consistent approach applied to supporting customers.   
The  SMAX  offering  continues  to  be  developed  with 
a  mobile  app  version  being  created  for  release  to 
customers  FY24,  ensuring  ease  of  access  to  the  
support system.

• 

• 

Targeted  customer  marketing  and  communications 
–  during  the  year,  the  Group’s  marketing  team  has 
continued  to  enhance  its  customer  communications 
and  the  way  in  which  campaigns,  product  launches 
and  solution  migrations  are  communicated.  Targeted 
and personalised communications are agreed between 
the  Group’s  marketing  team  and  customers’  account 
and  service  delivery  managers,  to  ensure  that  the 
right  customers  are  informed  and  guided  through  any 
changes which may affect them.

Solution webinar series and regional roadshows – these 
have been introduced during FY23 with a focus on the 
legacy  Redcentric  customer  base,  to  inform  them  of 
the Group’s expanded portfolio and capabilities and to 
ensure they are fully informed of the services available 
and contact points.

Suppliers  

• 

• 

• 

• 

The  Board  is  committed  to  fostering  and  developing 
effective partnerships with the Group’s suppliers, based 
on  forward  planning,  collaboration  and  trust.  These 
supplier  partnerships  are  crucial  in  delivering  many 
of  our  services  and  in  developing  them  further.  The 
supplier partnerships help the Group deliver value and 
quality to its customers and help its partners to develop 
and grow. 

The Group has in place an annual programme of regular 
engagement  and  communication  with  all  suppliers. 
There is a particular emphasis on key strategic partners, 
each  of  which  has  an  annual  review  and  other  regular 
check-ins which involve all relevant departments across 
the Company. 

The  Group  continues  to  invest  into  its  supply  chain 
management with the appointment of a new Procurement 
and Supply Chain Director who is implementing a new 
vendor  management  framework  to  drive  both  supply 
chain  effectiveness  and  efficiencies  but  also  enhance 
the  mutual  supplier  value  creation  through  innovation 
and collaboration with ‘ecosystem’ partners. 

The Company has given additional focus to the suppliers 
taken on following the acquisitions of 4D and Sungard 
DCs  and  those  whose  business  has  grown  as  a  result 
of the acquisition, notably carriers and AWS. As part of 
integration following these acquisitions, the Group has 
sought  to  work  with  suppliers  to  consolidate  contracts 
with  existing  suppliers  and  to  engage  and  build 
relationships with new suppliers.

27

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSection 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders (continued)

Suppliers (continued) 

• 

• 

The  Company  has  also  continued  to  give  additional 
focus  to  suppliers  in  the  faster  growing  sectors  of  our 
market,  such  as  cloud,  security  and  managed  services, 
driven by customer requirements.  

Following  on  from  the  work  in  FY22  with  the  Group’s 
supplier  base  in  reviewing  contractual  terms,  this  work 
has continued with the enlarged supplier base to ensure 
all  suppliers  are  governed  by  consistent  terms  and 
conditions  of  trading,  modern  slavery  processes,  anti-
bribery compliance and ISO requirements.  

• 

Some  of  the  Group’s  strategic  partnerships  are  listed 
below: 

 - Microsoft  –  Application  Development,  Application 
Integration,  Cloud  Platform,  Cloud  Productivity, 
DevOps 
(all  GOLD);  Content  and  Collaboration,  
Data Platform, Datacentre, Security (all SILVER); 

 - Cisco – GOLD;  

 - Hpe – Silver PRSP (Partner Ready Service Provider);  

 - Citrix – CSPP (Citrix Solutions Provider Programme); 

 - VM Ware;

 - Fortinet;

 - British Telecom and

 - Virgin Media Business.

Shareholders  

•  Analysts  and  investor  meetings  –  the  Chief  Executive 
Officer  and  Chief  Financial  Officer  hold  analyst  and 
investor  roadshow  meetings  throughout  the  year, 
particularly  following  the  release  of  the  Company’s 
interim  and  full  year  results  and  feedback  from  those 
meetings  is  shared  with  the  Board.  In  FY23,  a  full 
schedule  of  roadshows  took  place  with  a  number  of 
these  taking  place  in  person  for  the  first  time  since  
the pandemic.

• 

is  a  key  opportunity 

The  Company’s  AGM 
for 
engagement  between  the  Board  and  shareholders, 
particularly  private  shareholders.  In  FY23,  Redcentric 
was  pleased  to  once  again  hold  a  face-to-face  AGM, 
but shareholders were also again given the opportunity 
to  submit  questions  for  the  Board  ahead  of  the  AGM 
in  the  event  they  were  unable  or  unwilling  to  attend  
in person.

28
28

•  Annual Report and Accounts – the Group’s annual report 
and accounts is made available to all shareholders both 
online and in hard copy where requested. 

•  Group  website  –  all  presentations  and  announcements 
and other key shareholder information is available on the 
investor section of the Group’s website.

• 

information 

Further 
Governance Report on pages 43 to 63.

included 

is 

in  the  Corporate 

Environment  

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

The  Company  has  maintained  its  ISO  14001:2015 
environmental  management  accreditation, 
through 
which it enhances environmental performance, fulfils its 
compliance obligations, and achieves its environmental 
objectives. 

in  FY23, 
the  acquisitions  completed 
Following 
particularly the data centres acquired from Sungard and 
4D,  the  Company  has  undertaken  a  number  of  energy 
conservation  measures  in  relation  to  its  data  centres, 
including  the  introduction  of  cold  aisle  containment 
and  basic  energy-efficient  housekeeping  measures  in 
Hounslow,  water  chiller  replacement  and  investment 
work to prepare for the introduction of solar panels. In 
addition,  work  has  started  to  consolidate  data  centres 
with the closure of the Harrogate data centre, to reduce 
the  Group’s  data  centre  footprint  and  consolidate  into 
the more efficient Elland site.

The  Group’s  hybrid  working  policy,  permanently 
introduced across the Group in FY22, has continued to 
positively  impact  environmental  performance  through 
reduced office space energy usage and travel.

The  Group  launched  its  electric  car  salary  sacrifice 
scheme, open to all colleagues, as part of its commitment 
to reduce the Group’s carbon footprint.

(“ESG”) 

issues,  with 

In  FY23,  the  Group  created  a  new  Sustainability 
Committee  dedicated  to  environmental,  social  and 
governance 
representation 
from  across  the  business.    The  committee,  together 
with  assistance  from  third  party  experts  appointed 
specifically to assist with the Group’s ESG initiatives, has 
continued to further build on the initial work undertaken 
in FY22 is assessing the Group’s position on ESG issues 
and develop the roadmap and actions for delivering the 
Group’s ESG strategy.  

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Section 172 Statement – Our Stakeholders (continued)

Environment (continued)  

• 

Redcentric has continued to engage with third-party specialists to support the Group in calculating Scope 3 emissions, 
developing a net zero strategy, and to produce its first voluntary Task Force for Climate-Related Financial Disclosures 
(“TCFD”) report, which can be found on page 27 of this Report.  This is a significant step in the Group’s commitment to 
the environment and in support of the Government’s UK-wide target to reach net zero by 2050 and the Group is pleased 
to have produced the TCFD on a voluntary basis this year, ahead of compulsory reporting for the next financial year.

• 

Further information is included in the Sustainability section of the Report on pages 27-42.

Newly refurbished data cabinets offering colo and private cages - London Technology Centre

29

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportRisk management

The  Group  takes  a  holistic  and  consistent  approach  to  the 
identification,  monitoring  and  management  of  risk  across 
our entire business.  Risk underpins our company values and 
enables our strategies to succeed.

Our  risk  framework  is  mature  and  embedded  with  the 
business, maintaining confidence levels across our leadership 
team.    It  provides  the  capability  to  seamlessly  continue  to 
focus  on  our  customers  alongside  delivering  strategies  for 
product enhancement and business growth.

How do we manage our risks?  

Risks are managed on a tiered hierarchy, with each division of 
the business owning and managing risk to their direct areas, 
measured  scientifically  and  consistently  throughout.    High 
value  risks  are  cascaded  upwards  to  operating  Board  level 
and  then  beyond  that  to  Group  level  alongside  principal 
risks.  This allows the right level of visibility, ownership, and 
management  in  the  right  places  with  complete  consistency 
and transparency.  

All  the  Group’s  employees  are  encouraged  to  identify, 
record, monitor and manage risks at local level, empowered 
is 
take  ownership  whilst  management  oversight 
to 
maintained  throughout  with  continued  regular  review  
at all levels.

Our principal risks

Environmental impact

The Board very actively monitor both sides of environmental 
risk.  One side being the Group’s impact on the environment, 
including social, geographical, direct and indirect emissions 
and overall sustainability.  As our customers seek to reduce 
their  own  emissions,  demand  for  our  propositions  and 
services  change,  the  Board  recognises  the  importance  of 
our  corporate  responsibilities  to  do  everything  possible  to 
reduce the impact the Group has on the environment.  

impact 

functions  – 

The  other  side  of  environmental  impact  being  all  aspects 
including 
to  Group 
of  potential 
environmental  disaster  –  that  may  impact  on  our  ability  to 
maintain services and keep our customers, our sites and our 
workforce safe.  This is an increasing risk and gains a lot of 
focus by the Board as the physical impacts of climate change 
and the actions taken by governments and society to try and 
limit global warming. 

The  Group  is  managed  to  a  recognised  environment 
management  standard  and  maintains  an  annual  set  of 
environmental  objectives  to  measure  and  maximise  power 
efficiency across sites, reduce business travel, reduce use of 
paper and physical peripheries, reduce waste and proactively 

30
30

offset  our  carbon  emissions  through  carbon  reduction 
planning strategy.

Technology and cyber-security

The market for the Group’s services is in a state of constant 
innovation  and  change,  alongside  a  huge  growth 
in 
capability  through  acquisition,  increasing  the  risks  level.  
The  nature  of  the  Group’s  services  means  that  they 
are  exposed  to  an  ever-increasing  risk  of  cyber-attack.  
Alongside maintaining constant, pro-active vigilance against 
such risks, the Group maintains membership of some of the 
highest levels of security accreditation as part of the service 
it  offers  its  customers.    Over  the  past  year,  the  Group  has 
grown its security capabilities, both internally and externally 
facing.    This  helps  to  meet  the  ever-increasing  threats 
placed upon the industry in general and globally.  The focus 
here  and  current  mitigations  not  only  allows  the  Group  to 
protect  itself  in  the  best  ways  possible,  but  also  offers  this  
capability  directly 
them  with  
their own internal risk.

to  customers,  helping 

Business continuity

The  Board  believes  that  one  of  the  key  differentiators  that 
the  Group  offers  is  that  its  services  are  provided  over  its 
own controlled and managed infrastructure, such as its own 
networks  and  data  centres.  Whilst  this  provides  customers 
with  comfort  around  resilience  and  reliability,  the  Group 
is  also  exposed  to  a  variety  of  risks  to  business  continuity 
through  infrastructure  failure,  loss  of  physical  site,  logical 
access  failures  and  impact  to  its  people.  A  critical  element 
of  the  Group’s  operating  methodologies  and  procedures 
is  to  mitigate  such  risks  through  the  careful  construction, 
maintenance  and  management  of  all  elements  of  Business 
continuity,  adhering  to  industry  standard  methodology. 
Operating  regular  externally  audited  exercises,  maintaining 
continuity plans across all areas alongside our fully resilient 
technical  landscape  with  regular  testing  of  back-up  and 
recovery plans.

Business growth

Acquiring  differing  businesses  with  differing  technologies, 
people,  competencies  and  processes  creates  risk  to  both 
customers  and  services  being  acquired,  and  the  Group’s 
existing operating model.  With our increasing size through 
recently  executed  growth  strategies,  we  strive  to  ensure 
acquisitions  are  handled  appropriately  from  the  outset,  as 
demonstrated through activity in FY23.  The Group consider 
this  risk  split  into  three  main  areas  with  the  following 
mitigations in place:

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Risk management (continued)

Business growth (continued)

Loss of major contract

Failure  to  successfully  manage  our  large,  significant  and 
complex  clients  could  lead  to  a  loss  of  significant  revenue 
and possible reputational damage.  To address this risk, the 
Group pro-actively maintain Sales Management Plans, hold 
regular customer meetings by account teams, aligns service 
delivery  to  sales  in  order  to  support  both  ours  and  our 
customers strategies. The Group also operates a meaningful 
and  accurate  customer  satisfaction  methodology  with 
feedback loop.

Competition and market pressures

for 

The  Group  operates  in  a  highly  competitive  marketplace 
and,  while  the  Board  believes  that  the  Group  enjoys 
significant  strengths  and  advantages  in  competing  for 
business,  some  of  its  competitors  are  much  larger  with 
considerable  scale  that  could  allow  them  to  offer  similar 
services 
lower  prices  than  the  Group  would  be 
prepared  to  match.  Competitors  could  therefore  materially  
adversely  impact  the  scale  of  the  Group’s  revenues  and  
its profitability. The Group monitors competitors’ activity and 
constantly  reviews  its  own  services  and  prices  to  ensure  a 
competitive position in the market is maintained. Capability 
and  scale  acquisitions  are  both  expected  to 
further 
strengthen  the  Group’s  positioning  within  the  marketplace 
through  competitive  pricing  (scale)  and  additional  services 
(capability).

•  Acquisition  target  risk  –  the  risk  that  the  Group  are 
unable  to  identify  suitable  acquisition  targets.    This 
risk  is  managed  by  a  combination  of  internal  resource 
dedicated  to  identifying  targets  complemented  by 
strong relationships with external advisors.

•  Acquisition  integration  risk  –  the  risk  that  completed 
acquisitions  are  not  integrated  into  the  underlying 
business  in  an  efficient  or  effective  way  leading  to 
loss  of  customers  and  employees  from  
potential 
the  acquired  business.    The  risk  is  managed  by  
including  active  participation  
detailed  planning, 
from 
to  ensure  acquisitions  are  
the  vendors 
integrated effectively.

• 

Post-acquisition  performance  risk  –  the  risk  that  the 
acquired business may not perform as well as expected 
or synergies may not be delivered as planned.  This has 
the  potential  to  adversely  impact  both  cashflow  and 
profits post-acquisition.  Due diligence and integration 
planning  help  manage  this  risk  including  the  use  of 
experts throughout the acquisition process.

The  Group  manages  our  growth  risks  by  regular  reviews  of 
the operational structure and resource required to deliver to 
customers without degrading service.

Workforce

As a service provider the Group is dependent on the skill and 
experience of its established workforce.  The Group could be 
adversely  impacted  if  employee  levels  are  not  maintained.  
The  Group  aims  to  recruit  suitably  skilled  and  experienced 
employee  by  offering  a  challenging  and  rewarding  work 
remuneration  packages 
environment  with  appropriate 
relative to their skills and experience.  The Group has offices 
in  multiple  locations  which  helps  to  access  talent  pools  in 
various locations across the country.

Market and economic conditions

Market  and  economic  conditions  are  recognised  as  one  of 
the  principal  risks  in  the  current  trading  environment.  This 
risk  is  mitigated  by  the  monitoring  of  trading  conditions 
and the constant search for ways to achieve new efficiencies 
in  the  business  without  impacting  levels  of  service.    The 
Board  considers  the  Group  is  relatively  protected  against 
significant  customer  risk  due  to  the  Group’s  diverse 
customer  base,  however  loss  of  a  major  contract  remains  a 
principal  risk,  as  discussed  below.  At  the  date  of  approval  
of these financial statements the macro-economic conditions 
remain unpredictable and as such is seen as an increasing risk 
to the business which the board continue to closely review.    

31

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportCorporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues

FY23 is a year in which we have been focused on the onboarding and integration of 

our  new  businesses  and  colleagues.  Our  colleagues  have  been  relentlessly  focused 

on  maintaining  our  high  standards  of  service  and  support  whilst  also  ensuring  a 

seamless transition for all our new customers into the Redcentric business in addition 

to welcoming, supporting and integrating our new colleagues.   

All  our  new  colleagues  have  now  been  fully  set  up  on  our 
people  system  and  propositions  and  we  are  really  excited 
about working with them moving forwards and continuing to 
create one new, combined Redcentric team.

In  FY23  following  the  acquisitions  we  have  continued  to 
evolve our operating model to meet the needs of our business 
and  customers.  We  have  created  a  new  operational  division 
to  focus  on  meeting  the  security  needs  of  existing  and  new 
customers, establishing a dedicated security division which we 
are intending to grow significantly over the coming year. The 
investment in our structures at the end of FY22 is, as expected, 
supporting  both  our  solutions  and  service  aspirations.  To 
ensure  the  highest  standards  of  service  for  our  business  we 
have combined our support and service teams to create one 
centre  of  excellence  which  supports  customers  across  all 
businesses.  Investment  in  our  CTO  structures  is  also  paying 
dividends and we are excited about a number of new initiatives 
that will shortly be coming to fruition.

Whilst the main focus of the HR team has been on boarding 
and  integration,  we  have  also  continued  to  focus  on  our 
employment  proposition,  making  further  enhancements 
to  our  HR  system  and  people  policies  to  further  enable 
our  employees  to  take  control  of  their  working  experience. 
We  have  maintained  and  are  committed  to  maintain  our 
new  hybrid  working  model  which,  in  addition  to  our  new 
office  locations,  has  given  us  access  to  a  much  broader 
geographical talent pool. 

I would like to express my personal thanks for the commitment 
and dedication that each and every one of our colleagues has 
shown over what has been a very busy but exciting year. The 
progress we have made has been phenomenal and that quite 
simply is down to the passion, enthusiasm and focus of our 
colleagues. 

Listening to our Colleagues

In  FY20  we  launched  an  ongoing  listening  programme  to 
ensure we had the opportunity to hear and understand the 
views of each and every colleague in our business. As a result 
of this programme, we have already introduced a number of 
new people programmes and initiatives over the 

last 2 years and we will continue to evolve these in tandem 
with feedback from our teams.  

We are committed to continuing to listen to the views of our 
colleagues and have recently launched our latest colleague 
survey, running across all colleagues and business heritages. 

We will receive the results over the next 4 weeks and will be 
sharing  the  feedback  with  our  colleagues  from  September, 
ahead  of  commencing  a  new  programme  of  activity  in 
response to what our colleagues have told us. 

A number of the initiatives we have rolled out to existing and 
new colleagues include:

•  Our Group-wide vision, mission and values which are fully 

embedded in our performance and recognition schemes 

•  Our online learning management system with additional 
content  to  support  our  colleague’s  development  and 
continued  investment  in  supporting  our  colleagues  in 
achieving  industry  recognised  accreditations  that  are 
critical to our business.

•  Our online performance and development and recognition 
systems which form part of Peoplecentric, our HR system, 
enabling  colleagues  with  easy  one-stop  access  to  their 
objective and development actions, as well as the ability to 
quickly recognise other colleagues more easily. 

•  Access  to  hybrid  working,  giving  colleagues  additional 
flexibility to work where they will best achieve their daily 
activities. 

• 

Investment 
supporting personal and professional development.

in  the  roll  out  of  LinkedIn  Learning, 

•  A  new  externally  hosted  whistleblowing  helpline  to 
give our colleagues enhanced confidence in raising and 
reporting any areas of concern confidentially.

•  Continued  access  to  all  our  internal  communications, 
keeping  our  teams  connected  and  engaged  with 
monthly  all  colleague  calls  and  our  weekly  recognition 
shout outs. 

32
32

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)

Wellbeing

The  physical,  emotional  and  financial  wellbeing  of  our 
colleagues  is  a  key  priority  for  us,  especially  in  response 
to the current cost of living crisis which is impacting all our 
colleagues  and  we  are  continuing  to  explore  new  ways  to 
support our colleagues with this. 

Physical Wellbeing

All  colleagues  have  access  to  our  private  medical  and 
permanent health insurance schemes to give peace of mind 
and security, with the knowledge help is there if required. In 
addition, we offer a scheme supporting discounts on dental 
care, physiotherapy and a range of other health discounts for 
our colleagues. We have run a number of programmes over 
the last 12 months including focus on men’s health, women’s 
health, online fitness and eating healthily.

Emotional Wellbeing

We have continued and will continue to run our time to talk 
programme which comprises of a number of access routes for 
mental health support, led by a number of qualified mental 
health  first  aiders.  We  are  also  aiming  to  train  a  number  of 
additional  colleagues  as  Mental  Health  First  Aiders  over 
the coming months. Time to talk gives access to our mental 
health  first  aider  team,  access  to  our  employee  assistance 
scheme  and  supports  a  number  of  mental  health  initiatives 
including access to workshops including, personal resilience, 
managing stress, help for sleep, mindfulness and many more. 

Financial Wellbeing

The cost of living crisis has meant we have focused on ensuring 
we find new ways to help our colleagues make their money go 
further.  All  colleagues  continue  to  have  access  to  our  Perks 
scheme  which  gives  access  to  a  large  number  of  online  and 
high street discounts, we have introduced a new discounted 
Tastecard  scheme  for  colleagues,  with  discounts  on  a  large 

number  of  food  chains,  retailers  and  theme  parks  and  have 
also  commenced  a  discounted  programme  of  mortgage 
advice to give colleagues better access to financial advice. We 
have  also  introduced  a  new  electric  car  scheme  partnership 
enabling  colleagues  to  save  money  on  car  leases  whilst  also 
ensuring we continue to support the environment. 

We  will  continue  to  look  for  new  and  innovative  ways  to 
support our colleagues over the next 12 months. 

All our colleagues also have access to our Employee Assistance 
programme which offers help and support across a number of 
key areas, including external counselling support.

Equality and diversity

Creating a diverse, inclusive and great place for our colleagues 
to work is top of the Group’s people agenda. 

The  Group  actively  supports  the  principle  of  equal 
opportunities in employment and is committed to ensuring 
that  individuals  are  treated  fairly,  with  respect  and  are 
valued.  The  Group  opposes  all  forms  of  unlawful  or  unfair 
discrimination  on  the  grounds  of  colour,  race,  religion  or 
belief,  nationality,  ethnic  or  national  origin,  sex,  gender 
reassignment,  sexual  orientation,  marital  or  civil  partner 
status, age or disability (the “Protected Characteristics”).

It  is  important  to  the  Group  that  no  one  receives  less 
favourable  treatment  or  is  disadvantaged  on  any  of  the 
above  grounds.  Every  possible  step  is  taken  to  ensure  that 
individuals  are  treated  equally  and  fairly  and  that  decisions 
on recruitment and selection and opportunities for training 
and promotion are based solely on objective and job-related 
criteria.

We  have  also  established  a  new  diversity,  equality  and 
inclusion forum aimed to ensure we support these principles 
across the business. 

Gender Diversity

The average number of employees employed during the year was as follows:

Executive Directors 

Ops Board

Senior managers

Other employees

Total average headcount

Male

Female 

Total

2

6

25

451

484

0

2

7

95

104

2

8

32

546

588

33

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportCorporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)

Gender Pay Report

Our  gender  pay  report  at  the  snapshot  date  of  5  April  2022  showed  that  the  overall  difference  between  men  and  women’s 
earnings  at  the  Group  was  22%  (mean),  which  is  a  slight  decline  on  the  previous  year’s  report  of  21%,  mainly  as  a  result  of 
acquisition activity, but which is still an improvement from the 2020 gender pay gap of 24%.

Like most organisations in our industry, our gender pay gap is driven by a continued imbalance of male and female colleagues 
at different levels across the organisation. The majority of females in our business sit within the two lowest pay quartiles of the 
business which has negatively impacted our gender pay gap.

We have continued to focus on initiatives to increase the diversity of our business over the last year and are pleased that this 
is continuing to have a positive impact and we have appointed a number of females into senior roles across the business over 
recent months. We are confident that we will make further progress in addressing our gender pay gap, albeit this could likewise 
be impacted in the future by our more recent acquisitions over the last 12 months. Our commitment is to continue to focus on 
development and progression for our female colleagues over the next 12 months in line with the actions outlined within our 
Gender Pay Gap report.

Apprenticeship Programmes

Over the last 12 months we have also continued investment in apprenticeship programmes across differing areas of our business 
for  both  new  joiners  into  our  business  and  existing  colleagues.  These  programmes  have  focused  on  building  a  pipeline  of 
talent into our business to support a number of our functions, including sales, customer services, finance, procurement, project 
management  and  engineering  and  we  have  14  apprenticeship  programmes  currently  underway,  with  an  additional  number 
successfully completed within the financial year. Since the end of the pandemic, we are working more closely than ever with local 
schools, colleges and apprentice providers to increase visibility of these opportunities and to attract local talent to the Group. 
We also continue to actively support work experience placements and I’m pleased to say we are seeing an increase in interest in 
these programmes. Apprenticeships and work experience are both areas we are committed to maintaining and growing, given 
the benefits to both our local communities and our business.

We  have  also  launched  a  new  dedicated  sales  apprentice  scheme  to  develop  our  future  sales  talent  pipeline  with  6  current 
participants in the sales apprentice scheme, operating in conjunction with Leeds City College and Leeds Rhinos. 

Share Scheme

The Group is a strong believer that having and effective share employee share ownership programme helps to align colleagues’ 
interests  with  shareholders,  and  continues  to  provide  an  effective  tool  in  attracting,  retaining  and  motivating  employees.  In 
November 2014 the Group launched its SAYE option plan where colleagues contribute a monthly amount which is saved over 3 
years to buy shares in the Company at a pre-determined price.

The most recent grant was made on the 26 August 2022, with the Company granting options over a total of 562,199 ordinary 
shares. These options are available for exercise from 31 August 2025, with an exercise price of 96.07p.

As at 31 March 2023, the following options were outstanding under the plan:

Grant date

Exercise price 
(p)

Opening 
options

Options 
granted

Options 
exercised

21-Aug-2019

02-Sept-2020

27-Aug-2021

23-Dec-2021

26-Aug-2022

Total 

63.10p

119.60p

108.33p

99.87p

96.07p

369,393

241,311

168,998

615,029

-

n/a

1,394,731

-

-

-

-

562,199

562,199

34
34

Options 
lapsed/ 
cancelled

(8,479)

(97,734)

(75,760)

(118,156)

(87,677)

Options 
remaining 

-

143,577

93,238

496,873

474,522

(360,914)

-

-

-

-

(360,914)

(387,806)

1,208,210

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Corporate Responsibility 
Our Colleagues (continued)

Hybrid Working 

Given the success we experienced deploying home working and communication tools throughout the pandemic we continue 
to be committed to maintaining a hybrid working model. We strongly believe that there are benefits to both being in the office, 
collaborating closely with colleagues as well as the ability to ensure focused thinking time whilst working from home. Adopting 
this model brings real business benefits, expands out talent pool and ensures we keep our colleagues motivated with a flexible 
approach to their working arrangements, which we know is very important to our colleagues. 

Charitable Activity 

Since the return to the office, we have continued and in fact increased the number of both virtual and face to face volunteering 
challenges and fundraising events. 

These include maintenance of our Trees for Life partnership where we purchase a tree for every colleague joining the business 
and our new partnership with Generation, a national charity which supports underprivileged young adults into the workplace. 

From a charity perspective we have maintained our support and commitment to a number of key charities through colleague 
fundraising initiatives including:

• 

• 

Red Nose Day & Children in Need

Easter egg appeal

•  Mission Christmas

•  Macmillan coffee morning 

•  Children’s Heart Surgery Fund

•  Charity Walks

We continue to support local volunteering activity and fundraising by encouraging all colleagues to use their day’s paid volunteering 
leave to support causes close to their heart and we have seen a higher than ever uptake in the uptake of volunteering days. 

We are also continuing to evolve our national corporate social responsibility (“CSR”) strategy to support our key customers in 
their local areas.

Health and safety 

The  Group  is  committed  to  maintaining  high  standards  of  health  and  safety.  New  starters  receive  health  and  safety  training 
through our online learning management system during their induction period and refresher training is provided to all colleagues 
every  twelve  months.  No  RIDDOR  (Reporting  of  Injuries,  Diseases  and  Dangerous  Occurrences  Regulations)  accidents  were 
reported during the year.

Our  new  offices  and  sites  have  been  assessed  through  the  course  of  the  year  and  we  are  confident  all  sites  comply  with  
all requirements. 

35

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting

Within  the  Group,  we  recognise  the  importance  of  addressing  the  potential  risks  and  opportunities  presented  by  climate 
change. We are committed to being responsible and sustainable in our operations, as an IT company. As part of our efforts 
to be at the forefront of the IT sector’s net-zero goals, we have voluntarily reported against the Task Force on Climate-Related 
Financial Disclosure (TCFD) recommendations this financial year. The TCFD framework provides a comprehensive structure, 
which enables us to identify and address climate-related risks and opportunities that may affect our business. This will position 
us better to comply with the BEIS Climate-Related Financial Disclosure for FY24.    

As an IT service provider, we acknowledge our responsibility to the environment. We are currently developing our Net Zero 
targets and strategy, which will be finalised in H1 FY24 and align with UK government’s 2050 net-zero target. 

By  disclosing  our  climate-related  financial  information  consistent  with  the  TCFD  recommendations,  we  aim  to  provide 
transparency to our stakeholders, on our approach to managing climate-related risks and opportunities. We recognise that 
addressing climate change is an ongoing process. We are committed to continuously evolving our approach, to ensure that 
we are adequately addressing the challenges and opportunities presented by climate change.

The TCFD Framework

Climate change presents noteworthy trials for businesses, compelling them to adopt measures that mitigate risks and adapt to 
the existing changes. By doing so, companies can cultivate operations that are both sustainable and resilient. The Task Force 
on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) was instituted by the Financial Stability Board (FSB) in 2015 with the purpose of 
formulating a series of recommendations for companies to divulge climate-related risks and opportunities. 

The TCFD has gained support from a wide array of organisations, including the G20, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), and 
the World Bank. An increasing number of companies are now embracing the practice of disclosing climate-related information in 
accordance with the TCFD framework. This framework is designed to aid companies in comprehending and managing climate-
related risks and opportunities. It facilitates investors and other stakeholders in grasping the financial impacts of climate change 
and represents a significant stride towards tackling this issue. 

The TCFD framework encompasses 11 recommendations that are categorised into four key themes: Governance, Strategy, Risk 
Management, and Metrics and Targets. By adhering to these recommendations, the Group can identify, evaluate, and address 
climate-related risks and opportunities that impact our operations.

About us

The Group is a digital transformation partner. We deliver highly available cloud, communications, network and cyber security 
solutions that help public and private sector organisations succeed. Founded in 1997, we have fast and secure datacentres in 11 
locations around the UK. 

Our Vision

•  A trusted cloud and communications transformation partner, underpinned by strong networking and security services.

Our Mission

•  We deliver agile, available and assured solutions that help organisations succeed.

Our Values

•  Our values support our strategic objectives and sit at the heart of our business and our culture. We work hard to integrate 

our values into everything we do.

Proactive 

We think and act quickly

Inspired
We create excitement 
through innovation

Trusted
We do what we say  
we will

Collaborative
We work together to 
deliver a common goal

Transparent
We are open, honest 
and fair

36
36

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Governance

The  Group  remains  committed  to  a  rigorous  and  reliable  approach  to  identifying,  monitoring  and  managing  risk  across  all 
aspects  of  our  business.  Our  consistent  risk  management  approach  is  grounded  in  our  core  values  and  supports  our  overall 
business strategies, to ensure their success.

The Board of Directors

Details of the Board of Directors and their experience can be found at pages 62 and 63.

The  Board  is  responsible  for  the  company’s  response  to  climate  change.  They  ensure  that  appropriate  climate  management 
practices  are  integrated  into  our  future  business  operations  and  financial  strategy.  The  Board  provides  oversight  on  climate-
related risks and opportunities and annually evaluates progress in this area. The Board are supported by our third-party ESG 
specialists, who provide expertise on climate change to support this process.

Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Peter Brotherton, and Chief Finance Officer (CFO), David Senior, oversee sustainability and regularly 
communicate with our stakeholders, management, and the Board regarding climate change-related issues. The Board recognises 
its unique role in representing and promoting the interests of all the Group’s stakeholders. They are accountable to shareholders 
for the company’s performance and activities. At present, there are no ESG criteria linked to the Board’s remuneration package. 
However, we have decided to address this, and we will ensure ESG targets form part of the executive remuneration package  
in FY24.

Through  their  commitment  to  strong  governance  and  oversight,  the  Group  can  effectively  manage  climate-related  risks  and 
opportunities. This approach enables the company to promote long-term sustainability while delivering value to our stakeholders.

During FY23, we established our Sustainability Committee, which plays a crucial role in ensuring that our climate change and 
sustainability efforts, align with our overall business strategy. The Committee oversees the integration of climate-related risks and 
opportunities, into our operations and decision-making processes. The Committee is responsible for reviewing and monitoring 
our sustainability performance. They provide guidance and recommendations to our leadership team on sustainability matters. 
The committee hosted three meetings in FY23 (20th January, 22nd February and 21st March 2023). The committee is comprised 
of  18  senior  managers  and  directors  at  the  Group.  They  will  endeavour  to  meet  on  a  monthly  basis  during  FY24.  A  third  
party  ESG  specialist  delivered  a  climate  risk  management  workshop,  with  climate  change  training  in  February  2023,  to  the 
sustainability committee. 

As part of our TCFD reporting, the Sustainability Committee provides oversight on our climate-related risks and opportunities. 
They ensure that these risks and opportunities are adequately disclosed in our annual reports. The Committee identify emerging 
sustainability trends and best practices, which are integrated into our business operations. Through their work, the Sustainability 
Committee  enables  the  Group  to  effectively  manage  climate-related  risks  and  opportunities,  promote  sustainable  practices 
throughout our business, and provide transparency to our stakeholders on our sustainability performance.

Strategy 

The Board’s strategy for growth involves identifying acquisition opportunities, investing in the Group’s own infrastructure, and 
effectively using the Group’s scale and resources to explore and invest in new technologies, to benefit our customers. Climate 
change poses a risk to this strategy, in all scenarios and timeframes, with the risks outlined in Tables A, B and C. 

Over time, we have continued to develop and refine our risk management framework, enabling us to maintain confidence levels 
throughout our leadership team. This framework provides us with the ability to focus on our customers’ needs while delivering 
on our product enhancement and business growth strategies seamlessly.

By effectively managing risks, we can proactively identify and address potential threats to our business operations, including 
those related to climate change and other environmental factors. This enables us to sustain and grow our business, in a way that 
is financially responsible and sustainable. Also, by promoting the long-term health and resilience of the wider community.

37

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Climate Scenarios 

To assess the impact of identified risks on our operations and financial planning, we utilized three climate change scenarios as 
suggested by TCFD. Our scenarios were developed using various internationally recognized frameworks, which are outlined in 
our 2023 TCFD report. The three climate change scenarios are outlined in Table 1. 

Table 1 – A table to show the three scenarios

Scenarios

Proactive

Description 

•  Governments, corporations, and the public collaborate to keep global warming below 2°C, compared 

to pre-industrial levels and take strict climate change mitigation initiatives.

Below 2°C by 2100

•  The Paris Agreement’s commitment to achieving Net Zero carbon emissions by 2050 is upheld by 

various companies.

 •  Governments establish stringent rules and regulations to limit greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. 

•  Although  the  physical  effects  will  not  be  harmful,  this  consistent  and  well-planned  approach  to 
combating climate change will cost businesses more in the short term, as we transition to a low-
carbon economy.

Reactive

•  A  delayed  reaction  to  climate  change,  will  force  unanticipated  implementation  of  policies,  to  cut 

global emissions at short notice.

2-3°C by 2100

•  This is where the COP26 agreements and policies fit. 

 • In the short term, business as usual (BAU) continues. 

•  Due to the delayed response, transition risks increase and some physical risks occur in the medium 

and long term.

•  Only the most innovative companies will actively decrease their carbon footprint. Governments will 

rely on technology to cut emissions.

Inactive

•  Limited action is taken to combat climate change. Business as usual continues for the ensuing few 

decades. 

Above 3°C by 2100

• Through 2040, rising global emissions will cause temperatures to rise by more than 3°C. 

•  Physical threats will be at their peak impact, as numerous climate tipping points are anticipated to 

be crossed, according to the IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). 

•  Governments  and  organisations  will  finally  act,  resulting  in  the  implementation  of  rushed  and 

fragmented policies. 

Time Horizons: 

Climate  change  effects  are  likely  to  extend  beyond  conventional  boundaries.  Therefore,  we  have  used  three-time  frames 
recommended by TCFD and aligned these with the UK Government’s 2050 Net Zero target, to model the above three scenarios 
(Table 2). 

38
38

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Table 2 – A table to show the three-time horizons.

Timeframe

Short-term 
2020-2025

Medium-term  
2025-2035

Long-term 
2035-2050

Description 

Within the short term, we may implement strategies that have noticeable effects and lay the groundwork 
for long-term sustainability. We want to lower risks and position ourselves for sustainable growth, by 
proactively adjusting to changing environmental conditions and incorporating climate considerations 
into our daily operations. We would typically experience greater transitional risks and limited physical 
risks in the short term.

Our medium-term analysis includes a crucial time frame for addressing climate change. We foresee 
significant  changes  in  the  regulatory  environment,  technological  improvements,  and  changing 
stakeholder expectations during this era. We want to manage transition risks and take advantage 
of fresh sustainable solutions, by proactively matching our business practises with developing low-
carbon prospects. This window of opportunity enables us to fund essential infrastructure, promote 
innovation, and support the overall decarbonisation drive.

We approach climate studies from a long-term perspective in keeping with our dedication to securing a 
sustainable future. With more time to prepare, we can evaluate any long-term physical risks brought on 
by climate change and develop elaborate plans to limit the effect on our business. We want to ensure 
resilience, lower emissions, and support the transition to a low-carbon economy by including climate 
considerations into our long-term planning. In the long term, we will typically see greater physical risks 
over transition risks.

In  February  2023,  we  discussed  the  results  of  the  climate  scenario  analysis  with  the  Sustainability  Committee,  to  assess  the 
potential impact of each climate-related risk and opportunity. Analysing the climate-related risks has shown that climate change 
poses a risk to our business strategy in all timeframes and scenarios. We provide an overview of the 8 climate-related risks and 
opportunities in Tables A, B and C.  As we are at the start of our TCFD journey, we have not performed financial modelling of the 
climate-related risks and opportunities. We will endeavour to undergo this analysis next year.  

London

New office space at Redcentric London Data Centre (Shoreditch)

39

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Table A: The Group’s climate-related transitional risks. 

Area

Market

Risk

Increased 
cost of 
energy 
and raw 
materials

Warming 
Scenario

Time 
Horizon

<2°C  
2-3°C 

Short - 
Medium

(2020-
2035)

<2°C  
2-3°

Medium

(2025-
2035)

Changing 
consumer 
preferences 
to more 
sustainable 
products 
and 
services

Impact

Description

Response

Within the Group, 
we maintain strong 
relationships with key 
suppliers and regularly 
review our suppliers. 

In FY23 and beyond, 
we will continue to 
monitor and maintain 
these relationships with 
our current suppliers 
so we will be informed 
as early as possible if 
there are any delays or 
issues with receiving 
the stock.

Energy price variations 
are not in our direct 
control. However, we 
monitor energy prices 
and always aim to be 
on the best renewable 
tariff.

We would expect our 
total CO2 emissions to 
reduce over time given 
our commitment to 
Net Zero (targets and 
timelines to be agreed 
during FY24). This risk 
can be mitigated by 
generating our own 
renewable energy 
(through Solar PV) and 
reducing our reliance 
on the National Grid.

Increases in costs could impact 
the Group’s profitability.

Over the past few years, the 
escalation of worldwide events, 
for example, the pandemic 
and other geopolitical issues, 
have caused widespread 
supply chain disruption in the 
technology sector. 

An unpredictable climate 
could exacerbate the impact 
of existing supply chain issues, 
with increased pressure on the 
sourcing of raw materials and 
finished goods.

Climate change is likely to 
exacerbate these issues 
resulting in potentially 
increased costs, supply 
disruptions and delayed 
deliveries.

Increased energy costs are 
already impacting the business 
and are likely to continue to 
rise.

A reduction in customer 
spending could have an 
adverse effect on the Group’s 
revenue and profitability. 

With ESG growing in 
importance, customers 
may change their consumer 
preferences to other IT service 
providers who are doing more 
for ESG and sustainability. The 
potential loss of business to 
more sustainable competitors 
could be detrimental to 
revenue. 

Failure to effectively predict 
and respond to changes could 
affect the Group’s sales and 
financial performance.

Expenditures 
- Increased 
indirect 
(operating) 
costs

Impact score: 
3/4

Likelihood: 
3/4

Revenue - 
Decreased 
revenue due 
to reduced 
demand for 
products and 
services

Impact 
score: 3/4

Likelihood: 
1/4

40
40

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Area

Risk

Reputation Increased 

stakeholder 
concern for 
ESG

Warming 
Scenario

Time 
Horizon

Impact

Description

Response

<2°C  
2-3°C

Short – 
Medium

(2020-
2035)

Capital and 
Financing – 
Decreased 
access to 
capital

Impact Score: 
4/4

Likelihood: 
1/4

As the world transitions to 
a decarbonised economy, 
our stakeholders are likely to 
have increased interest and 
concern for our sustainability 
credentials. 

An actual or perceived inability 
to understand and be seen to 
be taking action to reduce our 
overall carbon footprint is likely 
to negatively impact investor 
sentiment / ratings. This could 
potentially limit our access 
to capital, as the focus on 
environmental impacts, climate 
change and net zero targets 
increases.

We have already 
allocated internal 
resources through 
a sustainability 
programme and have 
engaged with a third-
party specialist, to 
ensure compliance with 
current and emerging 
regulations.

We will publish a TCFD 
Report to communicate 
our efforts to our 
stakeholders, including 
customers, and ensure 
our ESG strategy 
develops with guidance 
from best practices. 

The Group created a 
new ESG committee 
and held meetings in 
FY23. We appointed 
a third-party expert, 
to conduct a thorough 
ESG assessment of our 
business, so we can 
identify areas for us 
to improve. We have 
conducted our first 
TCFD disclosure in 
FY23, to understand 
the climate-related 
risks and opportunities 
associated with our 
business.

A   S T R AT E G I C   PA R T N E R   A N D   A   S A F E   PA I R   O F   H A N D S

41

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Table B: The Group’s material climate-related physical risks. The full risk register can be found in our 2023 TCFD report. 

Impact

Description

Response

Area

Acute

Risk

Increased 
severity of 
flooding

Warming 
Scenario

Time 
Horizon

2-3°C 
>3°C

Medium 
- Long 

(2025-
2050)

Expenditures 
– Increased 
direct and 
indirect costs

Impact: 3/4

Likelihood: 
2/4

After conducting climate 
scenario analysis on all our 
sites, we have ascertained 
that 8 of the eleven sites 
are exposed to a risk of 
flooding. This risk is expected 
to amplify in frequency and 
severity because of climate 
change. This vulnerability 
has the potential for direct 
damage to property, 
plant, equipment, and 
transportation networks, 
thereby increasing our costs.

 Additionally, there exists the 
possibility of delivery delays 
and further disruptions to our 
operational activities. These 
expenses may escalate, as the 
global premiums for property 
insurance are projected to 
surge by 29% by 2040, due to 
the impact of climate change. 

While extreme weather 
conditions have the potential 
to increase production 
costs or induce disruptions 
within our supply chain, 
it is improbable that they 
would irrevocably impede 
our long-term operational 
capability. Nevertheless, 
these disruptions may lead 
to heightened costs and 
potential price increases.

We recognise that 
increased flooding could 
result in disruptions to our 
business. 

We have conducted 
climate scenario analysis 
on all our eleven sites. We 
found that flooding was 
a direct risk for eight of 
the sites in the medium 
and long term. Some 
sites have mitigation 
measures in place to deal 
with flooding events or 
are situated on elevated 
ground thereby reducing 
the overall impact. 

We will continue to 
conduct this assessment 
on an annual basis and 
expand the analysis to 
include our supply chain.

We have conducted 
specific flood risk 
assessments on the 
most at-risk sites, and 
we ensure that we are 
comprehensively covered 
by insurance.

In the longer term, the 
Group will have to ensure 
that drainage systems 
at our sites are well-
maintained and serviced.

The frequency and intensity 
of heatwaves are expected 
to rise in the UK with 
climate change. In 2022, the 
heatwaves in the UK lead 
to 40-degree temperatures 
and disruption to multiple 
transport links. This leads to 
increased demand for cooling 
and energy (Air-conditioning, 
fans, water) at the Group’s 
sites.

Our data centres were 
impacted by the 2022 
heatwaves, especially 
our sites in Shoreditch, 
West Byfleet, Woking and 
Crawley. At our Shoreditch 
data centre, we had to 
cool the temperature 
down when temperatures 
rose well above 30 
degrees during the 2022 
summer heat waves. 

Increased 
severity of 
heatwaves 
and extreme 
heat

2-3°C  
>3°C

Medium 
- Long 

(2025-
2050)

Expenditures 
– Increased 
direct and 
indirect costs

Impact: 3/4

Likelihood: 
3/4

42
42

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Area

Acute

Risk

Increased 
severity of 
heatwaves 
and extreme 
heat

Warming 
Scenario

Time 
Horizon

2-3°C  
>3°C

Medium 
- Long 

(2025-
2050)

Impact

Description

Response

Expenditures 
– Increased 
direct and 
indirect costs

Power outages become more 
common due to a reduction 
in power production and an 
increase in energy demand.

Impact 
score: 3/4

Likelihood: 
3/4

The data centres must be 
cooled to operate under 
their capacity, which is 
optimal. Cooling will 
likely increase as climate 
change will be associated 
with hotter summers and 
heatwaves in the UK. 

We will in the coming 
years equip our data 
centres to deal with the 
increasing heatwaves over 
the medium and long 
term. This may over time 
require capex investment 
and lead to an increase in 
operating cost associated 
with air conditioning over 
the summer months. 

Supply routes may be 
disrupted as railways buckle 
and roads melt. 

Regular comfort breaks 
may be needed to ensure 
employees do not suffer from 
heat-related illness, which 
reduces productivity.

Rising mean temperatures 
will lead to a higher demand 
for cooling. 

Energy costs will rise as 
sites will require additional 
cooling, to maintain optimum 
temperatures for staff and 
operations. 

Staff wellbeing may be 
impacted if adequate cooling 
is not maintained. 

Employees may require more 
frequent breaks to avoid 
health risks associated with 
higher temperatures. 

Productivity may be 
impacted across the 
Company.

Power outages due to 
increased demand and 
pressure on the grid can lead 
to operation disruption.

Chronic Rising mean 
temperatures

>3°C

Long 
Term

(2035-
2050)

Expenditures 
– Increased 
direct and 
indirect costs

Impact 
score: 3/4

Likelihood: 
3/4

43

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Table C: The Group’s climate-related opportunities. The full register can be found in our 2023 TCFD report. 

Area

Opportunity

Warming 
Scenario

Time 
Horizon Description

Energy 
Resources

Linking energy 
performance 
change in data 
centres to 
external weather 
conditions to track 
performance.

<2°C 

Medium

2-3°C 

(2025-
2035)

As the climate changes, so 
will the technology to monitor 
the changes more accurately 
in weather patterns. The 
costs of operating our data 
centres are intrinsically linked 
to the weather. We must keep 
the servers within a certain 
temperature range, to ensure 
they are operating at maximum 
efficiency. 

Use of lower 
emission sources of 
energy.

<2°C 

2-3°C

Short - 
Medium

(2022-
2035)

Investment in resource efficiency 
will lower energy intensity and 
should lead to cheaper and 
more consistent operating costs, 
enhancing operating efficiency. 

This will be accomplished by 
decreasing energy use across 
the Group. The power needed 
for our data centres, heating, 
ventilation, air conditioning, and 
lighting are the main energy 
users on the sites.

Response

We can track this performance 
and improve monitoring of 
the effects the weather will 
have on our data centres. 
By accurately planning and 
tracking the performance of 
our data centres, we will be 
able to ensure our sites are 
operating at their optimum 
capacity. It will allow us to 
mitigate any other acute 
physical risks from climate 
change, such as flooding and 
heatwaves. 

Within the Group we are 
committed to decarbonising 
our operations as we embark 
on a journey to net-zero. 
We understand we will be 
required to invest in lower 
emissions technology across 
our operations, as more 
innovative solutions come to 
market over time. 

Increased energy efficiency 
technology will decrease our 
energy consumption and the 
energy costs for our business. 
The payback associated 
with lower-emission sources 
of energy will mitigate the 
upfront cost of technology 
investment.

Exploring other options such 
as installing Solar PV could 
further reduce this cost over 
time. Also, this would reduce 
our reliance on the National 
grid and help mitigate any 
carbon tax.

44
44

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Risk Management

Assess

To understand how the impact of climate change could affect 
the  risks  and  opportunities  to  the  business  over  time,  we 
facilitated  a  climate  risk  management  workshop  in  February 
2023, with our ESG partners (Inspired PLC). We discussed the 
impact  of  each  risk  and  opportunity  on  the  business  across 
three scenarios (<2°C, 2-3°C and >3°C) and three timeframes 
(short (2020-2025), medium (2025-2035) and long-term (2035-
2050)), enabling us to understand where the impact would be 
greatest on the Group’s business operations.

Appraise

Once  we  assessed  the  impact  of  each  risk  and  opportunity, 
we  assigned  a  range  of  risk  management  options.  During 
the  climate  risk  management  workshops,  we  assessed  the 
effectiveness  of  each  current  risk  mitigation  action,  for  each 
climate-related risk and opportunity. The climate-related risks 
were given a score for impact and likelihood, between 1 and 
4, which is consistent with our risk-management framework, 1 
being low and 4 being high.

Post-workshop  we  developed  a  climate  risk  management 
framework  that  will  feed  into  our  business’s  existing  risk 
management  process,  to  ensure  that  our  operations  remain 
resilient to climate change. Each risk was ranked from 1 – 8, 
using the existing risk management framework rankings. The 
combination of these rankings provided the overall risk level 
(Table 3). As we are at the start of our TCFD journey, we have 
not performed financial modelling of the climate-related risks. 
We will endeavour to undergo this analysis next year.

Address

To  reduce  the  impact  that  climate  change  will  have  on  our 
business,  we  have  introduced  mitigation  actions,  to  reduce 
the  climate-related  risks  (Table  3).  On  an  annual  basis,  the 
Sustainability  Committee  will  re-evaluate  the  risks  and 
opportunities  presented  by  climate  change  and  review  our 
mitigation actions to understand their effectiveness.

It  will  remain  the  Sustainability  Committee’s  responsibility  to 
review and update the climate risk register, to ensure that the 
opportunities  and  risks  associated  with  climate  change  are 
accurately assessed, acknowledged and monitored.

We  follow  a  tiered  hierarchy  for  risk  management,  where 
each functional unit of the business manages and owns risks 
in  their  respective  areas  scientifically  and  consistently.  Risks 
with significant value are escalated upwards to the Operating 
Board level and beyond to the Group level, alongside principal 
risks. This approach ensures the appropriate level of visibility, 
ownership,  and  management,  with  complete  consistency  
and transparency.

In  recent  years,  UK  businesses  have  experienced  some 
challenging external forces, such as the repercussions of the 
pandemic,  escalating  inflation,  and  a  cost-of-living  crisis. 
These  factors  have  heightened  numerous  key  risks  that  we 
have  experienced.  Nonetheless,  our  capacity  to  promptly 
respond  and  adapt  to  these  shifting  circumstances  has  set 
a  precedent  for  effectively  tackling  unforeseen  disruptions 
within our organisation. 

The advent of climate change is poised to exacerbate these 
challenges,  thereby  necessitating  ongoing  monitoring  and 
proactive measures to mitigate risks. To fortify our preparedness 
for such occurrences, the Group has implemented a resilient 
and  well-defined  framework  for  risk  management.  Over  the 
past  couple  of  years,  we  have  increasingly  integrated  the 
recommendations  of  the  Task  Force  on  Climate-related 
Financial  Disclosures  (TCFD)  into  our  risk  management 
approach,  aligning  ourselves  with  emerging  climate- 
related risks.

We  have  developed  a  four-step  framework  for  managing 
climate  risks,  which  guides  the  identification,  rating,  and 
monitoring  of  business  risks.  Working  with  a  third-party  ESG 
consultancy,  we  have  established  a  stand-alone  climate  risk 
management  framework,  as  part  of  our  TCFD  programme. 
This enables us to identify and evaluate climate-related risks 
and  opportunities.  This  framework  has  been  integrated  into 
our  broader  business  risk  management  processes,  which 
ensures  that  we  maintain  a  comprehensive  and  systematic 
approach to climate risk management.

Identify

During FY23, we engaged with third-party ESG specialists, to 
help identify and assess the appropriate climate-related risks 
and opportunities that may impact our business. The climate 
scenario  analysis  identified  14  climate-related  risks  and  two 
opportunities.    In  the  previous  financial  year,  we  identified 
climate change as a principal risk for the first time, under our 
broader principal risk of environmental impact.

45

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Transitional Risk Mitigation

We  realise  how  important  it  is  to  take  climate-related  risks  and  opportunities  into  account  when  making  strategic  decisions. 
These  risks  are  managed  by  our  Sustainability  Committee.  They  provide  the  Board  with  regular  status  reports.  It  is  vital  
that  we  identify  and  manage  these  risks,  whilst  embracing  opportunities,  to  realise  our  strategic  goals.  Our  main  goal  is  
to  demonstrate  to  our  stakeholders  the  effectiveness  of  our  strong  risk  management  process.  We  can  guarantee  openness  
and  comprehension  throughout  the  Group.  We  also  work  to  improve  our  mitigation  strategies,  by  coordinating  them  
with our main goals and objectives. 

Table 3: A table to show the actions to mitigate the transition risks. 

Area

Climate-related Risk

Mitigating Actions

Policy & 
Legal

Increased reporting 
requirements due to climate 
change

Mandates on and regulation of 
existing products and services

Carbon Pricing Mechanisms in 
the value chain

•  To guarantee that we can react effectively and rapidly to new climate 

change laws, we continuously monitor regulatory changes.

•  We have worked with a third-party ESG services advisor that keeps us 
updated on any new or proposed regulations from the perspective of 
climate change.

•  We will put into practice an action plan for scope 3 emissions and value 

chain participation as part of our Net Zero strategy. To lower the expense 
of offsetting, we want to reduce emissions as much as possible.

•  Although we will monitor progress of carbon taxes, we don’t expect it to 

suddenly affect our industry.

Market

Changing consumer 
preferences and increased 
sensitivity to ESG

•  We must make sure that changes to our ESG strategy and the work we are 
doing across our Group to operate more sustainably are made available to 
the public for the benefit of our stakeholders and customers.

•  We will monitor customers’ feedback in relation to sustainability and how 

our sustainable products are performing.

Increased costs of raw 
materials

•  To ensure that we can cut our energy expenditures as much as possible, 

we must keep up with energy-saving measures.

•  To ensure a diverse supply chain, we must maintain solid relationships with 

all our suppliers and frequently review our suppliers.

Reputation

Increased stakeholder concern 
damaging our reputation

•  To demonstrate our progress with climate change risks, opportunities and 

mitigation, we will continue to publish an annual TCFD report.

•  We are aware that ESG and sustainability are crucial to the long-term 

success of our company and vital to our stakeholders.

•  The sustainability committee will continue to oversee and refine our 

sustainability plan, with regular updates sent to the Board.

Technology

Substitute existing products to 
lower emissions alternates

•    Substituting our data centre equipment with lower-emissions alternatives 
will be associated with a substantial cost to the Group in all scenarios and 
timeframes.

•  We are taking steps to increase our data centres’ efficiency by 40%. We 
will continue to invest in and explore the possibility of improving the 
energy efficiency in our facilities.

Costs to transition to lower 
emissions technology

•   To reach our climate objectives, we might need to set aside money for 
capital expenses so that we can spend it on lower-emission technology.

•  We must make sure we thoroughly plan for these charges each financial year 

because these may be associated with significant costs to the business.

46
46

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Physical risk mitigation

The COVID-19 pandemic has shown the operational disruptions that can ensue from unforeseen and abrupt events. We take 
pride in our response to the pandemic, as it serves as validation of the efficacy of our current resilience strategy. Drawing from 
this experience, we are now factoring in the physical risks associated with climate change. The six risks we have identified could 
cause significant business disruption in the worst-case scenario. Therefore, we will continue to assess these risks on an annual 
basis, promptly reporting any alterations that may transpire. 

As we expand our TCFD process to encompass our supply chain, we anticipate that the impact of these risks will change. Table 4 
outlines the mitigation actions for the three acute physical risks and three chronic physical risks. Acute physical risks encompass 
sudden occurrences that elicit short-term consequences, such as floods, storms, and heatwaves. Chronic physical risks denote a 
more gradual impact, such as sea level rise and extreme heat. Our dedication lies in diminishing our exposure to physical risks 
and safeguarding the resilience of our business. 

Table 4: A table to show the actions to mitigate the physical risks. 

Area

Acute

Climate-related Risk Mitigating Actions

Increased severity of 
flooding

•  As our staff have the ability to work from home, the impact of floods is minimal at 

our office locations. However, this is not the case at our data centres.

•  To reduce the physical effects of floods at these sites, adequate upkeep of drainage 
networks will be conducted along with continuous robust flood risk assessments.

• All sites considered at risk will receive the proper insurance coverage.

Increases severity of 
forest fires

  •  This risk is more significant to our global supply chain, than to our UK operations. 

We will conduct a climate scenario analysis next year of our supply chain, to 
evaluate this risk.

•  The risk of forest fires presents a small risk to our Woking site. We will monitor fires 
when they develop in the surrounding areas. To date, wildfires have not posed an 
issue. However, with climate change we may have to increase our surveillance and 
develop a continuity plan in the event of a wildfire. 

Increased heatwaves 
and extreme heat

•  Our offices have air conditioning, and we will ensure that they will be fully equipped 

to manage heatwaves. Staff can work from home in periods of intense heat.

Chronic

Rising mean 
temperatures

•  The cooling of our data centres poses a risk for the Group. In the summer of 2022, 
some of our sites did not have adequate cooling, for example, Shoreditch. We are 
currently working on improving the cooling systems at these sites and will continue 
to evaluate each site’s performance annually.

•  Regular breaks and hydration will be provided, to ensure the health and well-being 

of staff on extremely hot days.

Sea level rise

•  In the coming years, we plan to extend our climate scenario analysis to include key 

suppliers for a better understanding of this risk’s implications.

Water stress

•  We already monitor water use at all our data centres. Two of our sites use water as 
their primary cooling system. Our West Byfleet and Crawley sites rely on water to 
cool them down, so we may have to invest in changing this cooling methodology, if 
access to water poses a threat in the future. 

•  Our TCFD process next year will include a climate scenario analysis of our key 

suppliers and supply routes, to assess this risk in our supply chain.

47

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Metrics & Targets

During  this  financial  year,  we  initiated  our  voluntary  TCFD  reporting  and  incorporated  our  sustainability  strategy,  as  a  crucial 
aspect of our business’s growth. To help us advance on our sustainability journey, we appointed a third-party ESG specialist, to 
assist us in enhancing and evaluating our environmental performance and data collection procedures. Under their and the ESG 
Committee’s guidance, we calculated our complete carbon balance sheet for the first time, which will serve as a starting point for 
our Net Zero target and transition plan that we plan to finalise in H1 FY24.

We  have  chosen  to  evaluate  our  sustainability  performance,  strategy,  and  our  resilience  against  climate-related  risks  and 
opportunities through various metrics, including carbon emissions. These metrics are outlined below in Tables 5 and 6 and will 
assist us in measuring our progress and informing our sustainability-related decision-making processes.

Metrics used to measure and manage our climate risks and opportunities

The Group’s climate risk register contains the metrics the company will use to measure and monitor climate-related risks and 
opportunities. As a company that is at the start of its TCFD journey, we aim to collate this data within the next two years and 
report annually thereafter on the progress of each climate risk against the identified metrics.

Table 5: A table to show the metrics used to measure and monitor the transition risks. 

Transition climate risks

Metrics

Increase in regulation due to climate 
change, enhanced emissions reporting 
obligations.

•  Annual cost (£) of internal resources used to monitor climate legislation and 

compliance.

Carbon pricing mechanisms.

•  An internal carbon price will be calculated within the next two years.

Mandates on and regulation of existing 
products and services. 

Increased cost of energy and raw 
materials. 

Changing consumer preferences 
to more sustainable products and 
services.

•  Percentage cost of adhering to new regulation on our products and 

services.

• Annual cost increase (£) linked to energy. 

•  Annually evaluating customer sentiment for sustainability among our 

products and services.

Increased stakeholder concern for ESG.

• Annually evaluating sustainability criteria on capital.

Substitute existing products and 
services to lower emissions alternates.

Costs to transition to lower emissions 
technology.

•  Percentage of revenue investment in improving energy efficiency in our data 

centres.

• Cost (£) of reducing our Scope 1 and 2 emissions.

•  Cost (£) of reducing our Scope 3 emissions, such as our EV salary sacrifice 

scheme.

48
48

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Table 6: A table to show the metrics used to measure and monitor the physical risks.

Transition climate risks

Metrics

Increased severity of flooding.

• Value (£) of key site assets located within flood risk zones.

Increased severity of heatwaves and 
extreme heat.

• Annual flood insurance premiums for sites.

• Annual maintenance costs due to damage from floods and storms.

•  Energy use (KWh) and associated costs (£) from periods of extreme heat.

Increased frequency of wildfires. 

•   Metrics will be calculated in the next two years, when we consider our value 

chain.

Sea level rise.

•   Value (£) of key sites located near coastal areas.

Rising mean temperatures.

•  Energy use (KWh) and associated costs (£) from periods of extreme heat.

High water stress.

• Water use (m3) at the Group’s sites and data centres.

Carbon emissions from our own operations (Scope 1 and 2) for FY23

As  part  of  our  commitment  to  sustainability,  we  are  focused  on  reducing  the  carbon  emissions  associated  with  our  business 
operations. We recognise that measuring our carbon footprint is the first step towards achieving this goal. We have calculated 
our Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions, in accordance with Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) regulations. For FY23, 
our Scope 1 emissions amounted to 191.40 CO2e, representing an 278.16% increase from FY22. Within the Group, we purchase 
renewable electricity for all our facilities. Therefore, our Scope 2 emissions are considered zero under a market-based approach. 
However, under a location-based approach, our emissions for FY23 were 10,055.40 CO2e, representing a 150.35% increase from 
the previous year. These increases are due to the pandemic ending and our normal operations beginning again. The current 
energy consumption for FY23 is now typical for our services. Although a third-party calculates our company’s data to estimate 
emissions, no formal assurance is provided. 

Table 7: The Group’s total energy consumption (kWh)

Utility and Scope

Scope 1 Total

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1)

Scope 2 Total

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2)

Scope 3 Total

Transportation (Scope 3)

Total

2022/23 Consumption (kWh)

2021/22 Consumption (kWh)

970,890

970,890

51,998,139

51,998,139

380,785

380,785

53,349,814

90,796

90,796

18,916,332

18,916,332

218,058

218,058

19,225,186

49

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

 Table 8: The Group’s SECR-compliant scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions

Utility and Scope

2022/23 Emissions (tCO2e)

2021/22 Emissions (tCO2e)

Location-based

Location-based

Scope 1 Total

Gaseous and other fuels (Scope 1)

Scope 2 Total

Grid-Supplied Electricity (Scope 2)

Scope 3 Total

Transportation (Scope 3)

Total

Table 9: The Group’s UK Location-based emissions intensity metric

All Scopes tCO2e per m2

Energy efficiency measures taken during FY23

191.40

191.40

10,055.40

10,055.40

88.94

88.94

10,335.74

2022/23

0.34

23.27

23.27

4,016.50

4,016.50

50.86

50.86

4,090.63

% change

-25.34%

We are committed to year-on-year improvements in our operational energy efficiency. A register of energy efficiency measures 
has been compiled, with a view to implementing these measures in the next five years.

Cooling System Efficiency Improvements

•  A  continued  programme  of  works  has  been  undertaken  on  furthering  the  improvement  of  the  cooling  efficiency  of  the 

Harrogate data centre. This has included:

•  AHU temperature sensor recalibration;

•  Air-flow management improvement through the removal of redundant cabling, and tile vent resetting;

• 

Increase of temperature set points within central AHUs;

• 

Installation of additional cold aisle containment cabinets, increasing the amount of cold aisle containment to 90%.

Working Pattern Alterations

• 

 Following  the  pandemic,  the  way  in  which  the  business  operated  changed,  and  this  has  continued  through  the  present 
reporting  year.    This  includes  the  continuation  of  a  hybrid  working  model,  reducing  the  energy  consumption  of  office 
spaces  due  to  lower  occupation,  and  use  of  MS  Teams  for  meetings  throughout  the  business,  mitigating  emissions  
from travel.

50
50

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Our first carbon balance sheet (including our Scope 3 emissions)

In  2022,  we  utilised  the  Greenhouse  Gas  Protocol  Corporate  Value  Chain  (Scope  3)  Accounting  and  Reporting  Standards,  
to calculate our complete Scope 3 emissions for FY22, which will serve as the baseline for achieving Net Zero.  We undertook 
a  thorough  data  collection  process,  to  determine  our  FY22  Scope  3  emissions.  As  we  have  the  internal  process  developed 
for calculating our Scope 3 emissions, in the next financial year, we will align this with our annual accounts reporting, so that 
we  are  always  reporting  on  the  current  financial  year.  This  procedure  emphasised  the  importance  of  the  emissions  related  
to our supply chain and logistics activities, as they represent a significant (%) portion of our overall emissions. The calculation 
of  our  FY22  Scope  1,  2  and  3  GHG  emissions  revealed  our  energy  consumption  from  electricity  (Scope  2)  and  fuels  (Scope 
1)  accounted  for  19%  of  our  total  footprint,  using  the  location-based  method.  However,  our  Scope  3  emissions  represent  
a  significant  proportion  of  our  GHG  emissions  (81%).  Therefore,  we  have  decided  to  disclose  these  in  our  annual  report  
(Table 10). 

The  most  significant  emissions  sources  are  from  the  goods  and  services  (including  capital  goods)  that  the  Group  purchases. 
These Scope 3 categories accounted for 64% of the Group’s total carbon footprint, using the location-based approach. Emissions 
associated with the use of sold products and fuel-related activities are notable contributors to Scope 3 emissions, accounting for 
9% and 7% respectively. In total, 9 out of the 15 Scope 3 categories were applicable to the Group.

The  Board  is  committed  to  fostering  and  developing  effective  partnerships  with  the  Group’s  suppliers,  based  on  forward 
planning, collaboration and trust. These supplier partnerships are pivotal in delivering many of our services and will play a crucial 
role  in  meeting  our  climate  targets.  The  supplier  partnerships  help  the  Group,  to  deliver  value  and  quality  to  its  customers 
and help its partners to develop and grow. The Group has an annual programme of regular engagement and communication  
with all suppliers.

New rack space at Redcentric London Data Centre

Refurbished London office space

51

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportSustainability Reporting (continued)

Table 10: the Group’s carbon balance sheet for FY23.

Emissions Scope & Scope 3 Category

tCO2e (location-based)

% (location-based)

Scope 1 

Natural Gas

Transportation (excluding grey fleet)

Other Fuels

Scope 2 

Scope 3 

1. Purchased Goods & Services

2. Capital Goods

3. Fuel-related Emissions

4. Upstream Transportation and Distribution

5. Waste Generated in Operations

6. Business Travel

7. Employee Commuting

8. Upstream Leased Assets

9. Downstream Transportation and Distribution

10. Processing of Sold Products

11. Use of Sold Products

12. End-of-life Treatment of Sold Products

13. Downstream Leased Assets

14. Franchises

15. Investments

Total All Scopes

23 

0 

0 

23 

4,017 

17,751 

88.94

13,960 

1,512 

64 

2 

69 

75 

N/A

N/A

N/A

2,069 

0.3 

N/A

N/A

N/A

21,791 

0.1%

0%

0%

0.1%

18%

81%

50.86

64%

7%

0.3%

0.01%

0.3%

0.3%

N/A

N/A

N/A

9%

0.001%

N/A

N/A

N/A

100%

An update on our net zero commitment

We  are  currently  developing  a  comprehensive  strategy  report  and  transition  plan  that  will  delineate  an  assortment  of 
decarbonisation  measures  and  pathways  aimed  at  attaining  our  objective  of  Net  Zero.  Our  primary  focus  includes  curtailing 
electricity  consumption,  enhancing  procurement  processes,  optimizing  the  utilization  of  our  sites  and  buildings,  and  actively 
engaging  with  our  staff.  As  an  IT  services  provider,  our  multiple  datacentres  necessitate  a  substantial  amount  of  grid-based 
electricity. Presently, we procure renewable energy to power all our sites. 

However, to reach our Net Zero goals, it becomes imperative to reduce our reliance on the national grid and begin generating 
renewable  energy  at  our  facilities.  This  can  be  achieved  through  various  initiatives,  such  as  the  installation  of  solar  panels.  
Our Net Zero plan will establish pathways in alignment with our short-term and long-term targets, guaranteeing the existence  
of  an  action  plan  that  bolsters  our  decarbonisation  objectives  and  adheres  to  the  guidelines  of  the  Science  Based  Targets 
Initiative (SBTi). 

52
52

Strategic reportAnnual Report and Accounts 2023Sustainability Reporting (continued)

Decarbonising our operations and reducing our Scope 1 and 2 emissions will be paramount for our Net Zero strategy. When we 
finalise our Net Zero transition plan in FY24, we will set an interim target for reducing our Scope 1 and 2 emissions.

We  aim  to  conclude  the  development  of  our  comprehensive  Net  Zero  transition  plan  within  the  initial  half  of  FY24,  thereby 
cementing our commitment to a sustainable future.

The Strategic Report on pages 4 to 53 is signed on behalf of the Board by

Peter Brotherton 
Chief Executive Officer 
24 August 2023

York

New office space at Redcentric York

City centre location adjacent to York Rail Station

53

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Strategic reportIntroduction to Governance  

The  Board  recognises  the  importance  of  high  standards  of  corporate  governance  and  integrity.  It  is  committed  to  effective 
corporate governance as the basis for delivering long-term value growth and for meeting shareholder expectations for proper 
oversight and leadership of the business. I am responsible, as Chairman of the Board, for corporate governance within the Group 
and the Board is committed to maintaining a strong governance and ethical structure that supports and sustains its decision 
making. We believe that having good corporate governance is fundamental to pursue success for the Group and its stakeholders. 
As such, the Company has adopted the Quoted Companies Alliance Code for Small & Mid-sized Quoted Companies 2018 (the 
“Code”) as its benchmark for governance matters. At the date of this Report we believe that we are fully in compliance with the 
Code, and were also fully compliant for the comparative period. 

This  section  of  the  Report  sets  out  how  the  Group  has  applied  and  complies  with  the  principles  of  the  QCA  Code.  We  will 
continue to review and update our approach and will update our Corporate Governance statement in the AIM Rule 26 section 
of the Group’s website.

Nick Bate 
Chairman 
24 August 2023

New Redcentric data centre facilities at Elland Data Centre

New rack space

54
54

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance 

Governance 
Principle

Principle 1 
Establish a strategy 
and business 
model which 
promotes long-
term value for 
shareholders

Application

The Group’s business model and strategy is discussed within the Chief Executive’s Review on pages 8 
to 10. 

Details of the key risks and challenges facing the Group and the high-level management of such are 
outlined on pages 30 to 31. The Group continues to operate a tiered hierarchy for risk management, 
with functional management of direct risks and consistent measures across all functions, and escalation 
of significant value risks, along with principal corporate risks, to the Group’s corporate risk register.   
The corporate risk register is shared and refined with the Audit Committee and Board at key intervals  
in the year.

Principle 2 
Seek to understand 
and meet 
shareholder needs 
and expectation

The Group continues to be committed to engaging with its shareholders to ensure that the strategy 
and business model and key events of the Company are clearly shared and understood. The Board 
believes that the disclosures of this Report provide information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Group’s performance, business model and strategy. Hard copies of the Report are issued to all 
shareholders that have requested them and copies are also available on the Group’s website. The 
Group’s half year report is also available on the Group’s website and the Group makes full use of the 
website to provide information to the shareholders and other interested parties.

The Company uses regulatory announcement through RNS to ensure that important news is 
shared with all shareholder and potential shareholders in a clear and uniform way and often issues 
announcements beyond those it is obliged to make.

The Executive Directors are also in regular contact with the Company’s shareholders and brief the 
Board on feedback and any shareholder issues. In FY23, investor briefings and roadshows were held at 
regular intervals, including following announcement of the preliminary and interim results, and other 
ad-hoc one-to-one meetings with key investors and potential investors were also held through the year 
to discuss the Group’s strategy and shareholder expectations, amongst other things. 

There is also regular dialogue with shareholders through the Company’s corporate broker, finnCap 
Limited (“finnCap”), who keep the Board abreast of shareholder expectations and reactions and assist 
in setting up meetings with potential investors. Any reports from analysts that refer to the Company 
or cover the sector are circulated to the Board to support their understanding of the views of the 
investment community. finnCap, as broker, provides feedback directly to the Board from shareholder 
meetings and events such as the investor days. An update on key shareholding changes and any 
relevant investor sentiment is also provided in each Board report and Board meeting. 

There is a dedicated investor relations contact email address by which shareholders or investors may 
contact the Company (investorrelations@redcentricplc.com) and the Company Secretary also deals 
with a number of written queries throughout the year along with the Company’s registrar, Link Group.

The Chair and other Non-Executive Directors will always make themselves available to shareholders. 
The AGM is a key opportunity for this, with shareholders being given the opportunity to raise  
questions during the AGM and the Board being available both prior to and after the meeting for 
further discussion with shareholders.  We were pleased to once again be able to welcome  
shareholders in person to our AGM last year, particularly following the constraints faced in recent  
years and look forward to welcoming shareholders again this year. Once again, to ensure that 
shareholders who are unable or would rather not attend the AGM have the ability to ask questions  
of the Board, the Board shall accept any questions relating to the business being dealt with at the  
AGM which are submitted by shareholders in advance to the Company. Any such questions should  
be sent to investorrelations@redcentricplc.com so as to be received by no later than 5 p.m. on Friday 
22 September 2023 and the Company will publish questions and responses on the Group’s website in 
advance of the AGM.

The voting record at the Company’s general meetings is monitored and we are pleased that all 
resolutions were passed by shareholders at the 2022 AGM. 

55

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 3 
Take into account 
wider stakeholder 
and social 
responsibilities and 
their implications 
for long-term 
success

Application

The Board recognises that the long-term success of the business relies on a number of key 
stakeholders, as described on pages 26 to 29 and pages 32 to 35, including colleagues and customers 
and that engagement with these key stakeholders is fundamental to helping the Board make the best 
business decisions.   

COLLEAGUES 

The dedication and skill of colleagues is fundamental to the Group’s operation and success and, as 
such, we are committed to colleague engagement and listening to and acting on feedback from 
colleagues.  This year, with the addition of new colleagues through the acquisitions of 4D and Sungard 
DCs, this has been especially important.

The Group has worked hard in FY23 to onboard and integrate new colleagues to give them the best 
welcome.  The Group has also continued to work on its employment proposition during the year with 
further enhancements to HR systems and people policies to enable employees to take greater control 
of their working experience. The hybrid working model implemented in FY22 and additional locations 
continues to provide access to a broader geographical talent pool. 

This year has seen the Group’s vision, mission and values be fully embedded into the Group’s 
performance and recognition schemes and additional content on the Group’s online learning 
management systems, together with a partnership with LinkedIn Learning, has provided colleagues 
with significant opportunities for personal and professional development. 

The physical, emotional and financial well-being of colleagues has been a key priority for the Group, 
particularly in the context of the current cost of living crisis and a number of initiatives have been 
implemented to assist colleagues in this regard – including healthcare discounts and schemes, 
webinars and sessions for colleagues on health, fitness and diet; increased profile of Mental Health First 
Aiders and access to a programme of events on resilience, stress management and mindfulness; and 
the introduction of a discounted programme of access to mortgage advice and introduction of a new 
discounted “Tastecard” scheme for colleagues. 

Investment has continued in the Group’s apprenticeship programme with fourteen apprentices 
currently in the Group and a number of apprenticeships completed in FY23.  A dedicated sale 
apprentice scheme was also launched in FY23, in conjunction with Leeds City College and Leeds 
Rhinos Rugby Club, with six participants in the scheme. 

Recognising the Group’s social responsibility, FY23 has seen an increase in volunteering and fundraising 
activity and an increase in colleagues using their day’s paid volunteering leave.

As detailed on page 34, the Group also has in place a SAYE option plan to enable colleagues to 
become personally invested as shareholders of the Company.  In FY23, the Company granted options 
over a total of 562,199 ordinary shares under this scheme. 

CUSTOMERS

The Group’s extensive customer services, which are detailed on the Group’s website at  
https://www.redcentricplc.com/services/, are core to the Group’s customer proposition and the  
Group is in regular dialogue with its existing and potential customers in order that it may understand 
and respond to their ongoing and future requirements. The Group also keeps abreast of customer 
needs and communicates it’s proposition to customers through regular customer surveys, monthly  
and quarterly service reviews and through its social media channels. In FY23 the Group continued 
its work to make its communications with customers more meaningful and targeted and the launch 
of phase 2 of its customer service management solution marked a key step in enhancing customers’ 
experiences with the Group. 

The Board also considers its shareholders, suppliers and the environment to be key stakeholders and 
details of how the Group fosters relationships with these stakeholders and considers their needs are set 
out in the Section 172 statement on page 26 of this Report. 

56
56

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 4 
Embed effective 
risk management, 
considering both 
opportunities and 
threats, throughout 
the organisation

Application

As set out in the Audit Committee Report on page 64, the Board is committed to ensuring that risk 
management forms part of the way the Group works and is embedded in the business, coordinated 
by the Chief Financial Officer, and with reporting on mitigating actions as well as the risks. 

In FY23, having identified climate change as a principal risk for the first time in FY22, there has been 
an increase in focus on emerging climate change related risks with the TCFD recommendations being 
integrated into the Group’s risk management framework. These risks are managed by the Group’s 
newly formed Sustainability Committee, which provides quarterly reports to the Board.

The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control and for reviewing its 
effectiveness. The implementation and maintenance of the risk management and internal control 
systems are the responsibility of the Operating Board. However, the internal control system is 
designed to manage rather than eliminate risk and can therefore only provide reasonable and not 
absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. The Board considers that the internal 
controls in place are appropriate for the size, complexity and risk profile of the Group. Ongoing 
enhancements continue to be made to D365, the Group’s ERP system, overseen by the Group’s Chief 
Technology Officer, which are expected to strengthen the control environment, particularly following 
acquisitions completed in FY23. The Board acknowledge that there is a requirement for continuous 
improvement to the control environment particularly following acquisitions made in the year and as 
such, improvement plans continue to be developed and implemented, with short and longer term 
plans to address risks and control weaknesses.  The principal elements of the Group’s internal control 
system cover financial, operational and compliance controls and include:

1.  close management of the day-to-day activities of the Group by the Executive Directors;

2.  an established budgetary system with the preparation and approval of an annual budget by the 

Board and regular monitoring and review of performance against budget, forecasts and prior year;

3.  detailed monthly reporting to the Board, both at Group and at divisional level (including financial 
information, performance against budget and key performance and risk indicators) whereby the 
Executive Directors report on significant changes to the business and external marketplace to the 
extent they represent significant risk;

4.  an organisational structure that has clear reporting lines and delegated authorities, particularly 

with the new divisional structure that was put in place at the start of FY23;

5.  management and monitoring of risk and performance at multiple levels throughout the Group; and

6.  continually improving finance, legal and assurance and compliance functions that maintain 

processes and systems to enhance the control environment, including the control of expenditure, 
authorisation limits, purchase ordering, sales order intake, contract review and approval.

The Group also works hard to maintain a number of ISO accreditations it has achieved over a number 
of years, detailed at https://www.redcentricplc.com/about-us/accreditations-frameworks/, and has a 
number of policies and procedures in place in order to fulfil the requirements of and maintain these 
accreditations.

57

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 5 
Maintain the 
board as a well-
functioning, 
balanced team led 
by the chair

Application

The composition of the Board is detailed on page 62.  

The Board delegates specific responsibilities to the Board committees.  The composition of the 
committees and how they discharge their responsibilities can be found on page 62.

Part of the role of the Board’s Nomination Committee, chaired by Nick Bate, is to keep the 
composition of the Board under review as the Group’s business evolves. Following Jon Kempster’s 
resignation, Alan Aubrey joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Company’s 
Audit Committee. Alan brought with him considerable market knowledge and breadth and depth of 
skills and experience. Following the end of FY23, Helena Feltham stepped down from the Board and 
as Chair of the Remuneration Committee. Given Helena’s departure, Alan Aubrey was also appointed 
as interim Chair of the Company’s Remuneration Committee and Nick Bate was appointed as a 
temporary member of the Audit Committee, pending appointment of a new Non-Executive Director 
and Chair of the Remuneration Committee. The process for recruitment of a new Non-Executive 
Director has commenced, led by Nick Bate, and further details will be issued in due course. The 
Board is mindful of the benefits of having diversity on the Board and will seek to address this with 
this appointment. 

The Board is satisfied that it has an appropriate balance between independence and knowledge 
of the Group to enable it to discharge its duties and responsibilities effectively. All Directors are 
encouraged and expected to use their independent judgement and to challenge matters where 
required, both strategic and operational. 

The Executive Directors of the Company are employed on a full-time basis. Non-Executive Directors 
are required to devote such time to the Group’s affairs as necessary to discharge their duties and 
this may change from time to time. In addition to scheduled Board meetings, members are required 
to attend other ad hoc Board meetings, committee meetings, the AGM and any other business or 
general meetings as required. Board members are also required to consider all relevant papers 
before each meeting and to devote additional time in respect of preparation and ad hoc matters 
which may arise. Non-Executive Directors are required to obtain the agreement of the Chairman 
before accepting additional commitments that may affect the time that they are able to devote to 
their role as a Non-Executive Director. Further details of external appointments of the Board are 
included in their biographies on page 62.  

Details of the number of regular scheduled meetings of the Board and committees, together with the 
attendance record for each Board member, are set out on page 61. 

The Board recently concluded an assessment of its performance, and more detail is provided below 
against Principle 7. 

58
58

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 6 
Ensure that 
between them the 
directors have the 
necessary up-to-
date experience, 
skills and 
capabilities

Principle 7 
Evaluate board 
performance 
based on clear and 
relevant objectives, 
seeking continuous 
improvement

Application

Directors’ details and biographies are on page 62. The Board considers that, other than the gap 
left by Helena Feltham’s departure and the Remuneration Chair vacancy, it has sufficient skills and 
experience to enable it to execute its duties and responsibilities effectively given the nature and size 
of the Group. As mentioned above, the appointment of Alan Aubrey further enhances its capabilities 
and complements the skills and experience of the current Directors. Directors are responsible for 
ensuring their continuing professional development to maintain their effective skills and knowledge. 

As part of the Board performance assessment recently concluded, details of which are set out below, 
each Board member provided information on their individual skills and experience in areas relevant 
to the Group. This exercise indicated a high level of capability in most areas but highlighted some 
skill sets which could form part of the specification for any future Board appointments, some of 
which should be fulfilled and enhanced by the appointment of a new Non-Executive Director and 
Remuneration Committee Chair.  

The Board receives monthly reports on the Group’s operational and financial performance as 
mentioned above, and formal agendas and reports are also circulated to the Board in advance 
of meetings. The Board has access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary, who is 
responsible for ensuring that Board procedures are followed, and applicable rules and regulations 
are adhered to. Directors are able to obtain further advice or seek clarity on issues raised in reports 
or at meetings from within the Group or from external sources. The Board also has a procedure 
whereby any director may seek, through the Company Secretary, independent professional advice 
in furtherance of their duties, if necessary, at the Group’s expense. Jon Kempster and, following his 
resignation, Alan Aubrey, was the Company’s Senior Independent Director during FY23 and provided 
a sounding board for the Chairman and also served as an intermediary for the other directors where 
required. 

External advisers or consultants have been engaged by the Board in respect of its remuneration 
policies, in relation to implementation of the Company’s corporate and acquisition strategy and in 
relation to the appointment of both Alan Aubrey to the Board and commencement of recruitment of 
a new Remuneration Committee Chair, all being significant matters. 

On appointment to the Board, new directors receive a tailored induction pack and introductions to 
relevant personnel within the Group. 

The Board recently carried out its annual evaluation. Following its first externally facilitated evaluation 
in a number of years in FY22, the FY23 assessment was internally facilitated and comprised the 
following elements:

-  a questionnaire completed by every Board member covering Board and Committee structure, 

processes, agendas and priorities. Each Board member’s assessment of their individual 
performance and feedback on each other was also sought. The questionnaire was based on ones 
designed by external consultants with considerable experience of Board reviews, but tailored to 
meet the specific circumstances of the Group; 

-  completion of a skills matrix by each Board member, as referred to under Principle 6 above, to 
identify areas of expertise on the Board and additional areas that the Board could consider in 
relation to future appointments; 

-  Review by the Board of the consolidated outputs of the questionnaire and skills matrix, facilitated 

by the Company Secretary and Chairman. 

In addition to the appointment of a new a new Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee, the process identified a number of other actions which the Board believes will assist in 
improving Board performance and these will be implemented during the year, including: 

- timings of Board reports prior to meetings;

- ongoing review of Board composition;

- ongoing review and update of the Company’s investor relations and communications policy;

- review of the Group’s ESG strategy and priorities;

- ongoing review of succession planning. 

59

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 8 
Promote a 
corporate culture 
that is based on 
ethical values and 
behaviours

Application

The Board aims to lead by example with respect to promoting a healthy corporate culture and 
ensuring that ethical values and behaviours are embedded in the business. The processes in place 
for decision making, which are documented in its Committee terms of reference, the Company’s 
share dealing code and the requirement for ongoing disclosure of interests, are all examples of 
processes which require high standards of behaviour from the Board. 

Employment policies adopted by the Group assist in embedding a culture of ethical behaviour and 
the values set out in its corporate social responsibility statement. Ongoing training on the Group’s 
compliance and anti-bribery policy and the Group’s Modern Slavery Act policy launched in FY22 
continue to reinforce the culture of ethical values and behaviours.

The Group is pleased that in FY23 there has been an increase in charitable activity across the Group, 
with a number of volunteering challenges and fundraising events. This activity includes maintenance 
of the Trees For Life partnership, a partnership with Generation (which supports underprivileged 
young adults into the workplace), the Mission Christmas volunteering campaign, Easter Egg appeal 
and charity walks. Several local and national charities have been supported through the year by 
colleague fundraising, including Macmillan Cancer Support, The Children’s Heart Surgery Fund, Red 
Nose Day and Children in Need. 

All colleagues are granted a day’s paid volunteering and the Group encourages colleagues to use 
this day to take part in local volunteering activity. We are delighted that FY23 has seen a higher than 
ever take up of volunteering days.  

Further details of the Group’s charitable activity is set out on page 35. 

Principle 9 
Maintain 
governance 
structures and 
processes that 
are fit for purpose 
and support good 
decision-making by 
the board

The business and management of the Group are the collective responsibility of the Board. The Board 
meets at least nine times a year at various Company locations in accordance with its scheduled 
meeting calendar and this schedule is supplemented with additional meetings as and when required 
and monthly Board reports circulated in respect of the previous month. The annual calendar 
includes presentations from all members of the Operating Board through the course of the year. The 
attendance by each Board member at meetings held in the year is shown in the table below.  

At each scheduled meeting, the Board considers and reviews the trading performance of the Group for 
the previous month together with additional topics based on the annual Board calendar. The Board and 
its Committees receive appropriate and timely information prior to each meeting in accordance with a 
reporting timetable agreed with the Board and Operating Board. A formal agenda is agreed with the 
Chair for each meeting and papers are distributed several days ahead of meetings taking place. 

The Board has a formal written schedule of matters reserved for its review and approval including 
approval of the annual budget, major capital expenditure and interim and annual results. All specific 
actions arising are documented following each Board and Committee meeting, followed up by the 
Executive Directors and Company Secretary and then reviewed at the next meeting. 

BOARD COMMITTEES

The Board is supported by the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees. A report on 
the composition, responsibilities and key activities of the Audit Committee are set out in the Audit 
Committee Report and in the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the Remuneration Committee. 

The Nomination Committee consists of Nick Bate (Chair), Alan Aubrey (having replaced Jon 
Kempster during the year) and Helena Feltham. The Committee meets at least once a year and 
further as required, particularly as and when necessary to identify and nominate for approval by 
the Board, candidates for Board appointments. The Committee engages external consultants when 
appropriate to assist in the search for and selection of new Board members. During the year, the 
Nomination Committee was involved in the appointment of Alan Aubrey as Non-Executive Director 
and Chair of the Audit Committee and has also been involved in recruitment of a new Remuneration 
Committee Chair to replace Helena Feltham, who stepped down following the year end.  

The Committee has terms of reference in place which have been formally approved by the Board and 
once a year it reviews the structure, size and composition (including diversity) of the Board, considers 
succession planning and reviews the leadership needs of the organisation. 

60
60

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Governance 
Principle

Principle 9 cont 
Maintain 
governance 
structures and 
processes that 
are fit for purpose 
and support good 
decision-making by 
the board

Principle 10 
Communicate 
how the company 
is governed and 
is performing 
by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and 
other relevant 
stakeholders

Application

OPERATING BOARD

Authority for execution of approved policies, business plan and daily running of the business is 
delegated to the Executive Directors together with the Operating Board, which manages and 
monitors operational performance across the business and ensures effective decision-making. The 
Operating Board meets on a weekly basis and provides written reports to the Executive Directors on 
a monthly basis shortly before each Board meeting to ensure that the Board has the most up to date 
information possible. 

The Board communicates with its shareholders in a range of ways including through the Annual 
Report and Accounts, interim and full-year results announcements, further trading updates where 
required and appropriate, the AGM, investor roadshows and one-to-one meetings with major 
existing shareholders or potential new shareholders. The Group’s website (www.redcentricplc.
com), particularly the investor section of the site, also provides a range of corporate information for 
shareholders, investors and the public, including all Company announcements and presentations. 

Group performance information is communicated to colleagues, within the limitations imposed by the 
Company’s public company disclosure obligations, in a number of ways, including regular colleague-
wide email communications from the Executive Directors and Operating Board, monthly colleague 
briefing sessions and following year end, the Company launched its latest colleague survey.  

Further details of how the Company maintains a dialogue with customers and suppliers, both being 
key stakeholders, are set out in the section 172 statement at pages 26 to 29 of this Report. 

The following table details the attendance of the Board members at regular scheduled Board and Committee meetings held 
during FY23 which they were eligible to attend.

Name

Position 
(at 31 
March 
2023)

Main Board

Audit Commitee

Remuneration 
Commitee

Nomination 
Commitee

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Total

Attended

Nick Bate

-

Jon Kempster 
(Resigned 21 
July 2022)

Alan Aubrey 
(Appointed 21 
July 2022)

Helena Feltham 
(Resigned 24 
July 2023)

NED

NED

NED

Peter Brotherton

CEO

David Senior

CFO

9

3

6

9

9

9

9

3

6

9

9

9

-

1

3

4

-

-

2

1

1

2

-

-

2

0

1

2

-

-

1

0

1

1

-

-

1

0

1

1

-

-

-

1

3

4

-

-

61

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Non-Executive Directors

Helena Feltham 
Independent Non-Executive 
Director

Appointment date: 
7 July 2021

Resignation date:  
24 July 2023

Committee membership: 
Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee and a member 
of the Audit and 
Nomination Committees 

Experience and external appointments: Helena previously 
held  executive  roles  at  B&Q  plc  and  was  People  Director 
at  Jack  Wills,  Woolworths  South  Africa  and  Marks  and 
Spencer.  She  also  spent  time  in  executive  search  with 
Odgers  Berndtson,  covering  senior  appointments  across 
both  public  and  private  sectors.  She  has  served  as  a  non-
executive  director  and  interim  chair  at  Ted  Baker  plc,  as  a 
non-executive director in the NHS, as an independent director 
of  the  Assembly  of  Wales  and  as  a  Justice  of  the  Peace. 
Helena  currently  holds  non-executive  roles  with  Hostmore 
plc,  Dogwoof,  a  film  and  distribution  company  and  The  
Retail Trust.

Nick Bate 
Independent Non-Executive 
Chair of the Board

Appointment date: 
17 November 2021

Committee membership: 
Chair of the Nomination 
Committee, member of the 
Remuneration Committee and 
interim member of the Audit 
Committee 

Experience  and  external  appointments:  Nick 
is  an 
experienced chairman and non-executive director of a portfolio 
of companies across the data, communications, software and 
financial services sectors, and most recently sat on the board 
of directors for Nasstar plc for over 6 years.  Nick has a proven 
track  record  in  delivering  successful  growth  through  the 
application  of  his  financial,  commercial  and  operational  skills 
and strong experience in corporate M&A transactions. Nick is 
a chartered management accountant.   

Alan Aubrey 
Independent Non-Executive 
Director (and Senior 
Independent Director

Appointment date: 
21 July 2022

Committee membership: 
Chair of the Audit Committee, 
interim Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee and 
a member of the Nomination 
Committee 

Experience  and  external  appointments:  Alan 
is  an 
experienced  executive  and  non-executive  director,  having 
been  CEO  of  IP  Group  plc  from  2006  to  2021  and  having 
served  as  non-executive  chair  of  Ceres  Power  Holdings  plc 
and  Proactis  Holdings  plc  and  non-executive  director  of 
Avacta  Group  plc.  Alan  currently  serves  as  non-executive 
chair  of  DeepMatter  Group  plc  and  OxCCU  Limited,  and 
on  the  board  of  Trellix  Limited  and  Rio  AI  Limited.  Alan  has 
also  formerly  served  on  the  boards  of  several  large  private 
companies, including Oxford Nanopore and Oxford Sciences 
Innovation  plc,  and  served  as  a  non-executive  director  and 
chair  of  the  audit  committee  of  the  Department  of  Business, 
Innovation, University and Skills (‘DIUS’, now the Department 
of  Business,  Energy  and  Industrial  Strategy,  ‘BEIS’)  of  the  
UK government. 

62
62

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceCorporate Governance (continued)  

Executive Directors

David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer

Appointment date: 
3 April 2020 

Experience  and  external  appointments:  David  served  
in  the  role  of  Finance  Director  of  the  Group  since  2017,  
prior  to  his  appointment  as  Chief  Financial  Officer.  David  
is a chartered certified accountant with 20 years of experience  
in  finance, 
in  several  senior  positions  with  
Wolseley plc.   

including 

Peter Brotherton 
Chief Executive Officer
Appointment date: 28 
November 2016. Peter served 
as Chief Financial Officer of the 
Company from 28 November 
2016 to 21 November 2018 
and then as Interim Chief 
Executive Officer from 22 
November 2018 to 28 May 
2019, when he was appointed 
as Chief Executive Officer.  

Experience and external appointments: Peter has over 25 
years’  experience  across  a  number  of  senior  finance  roles. 
Peter’s  two  previous  roles  were  as  Chief  Financial  Officer  of 
Gametech and Chief Financial Officer at PKR Group. Prior to 
those two roles, from 2011 to 2014, Peter was Chief Financial 
Officer  and  then  Chief  Executive  of  Meucci  Solutions  NV. 
Meucci  Solutions  was  an  international  telecommunications 
and  managed  services  business.  During  his  time  at  Meucci 
Solutions,  the  business  saw  strong  sales  and  EBITDA  growth 
whilst  also  extensively  reviewing  its  central  financial  control 
function.    Peter  also  had  senior  finance  roles  at  Varla  (UK) 
Limited,  Cell  Structures  Group  plc  and  spent  five  years  at 
Kingston Communications plc, becoming Director of Finance. 
Peter  qualified  as  an  ACA  chartered  accountant  at  KPMG. 
Peter holds no external appointments.

A N   E X PA N D E D   D ATA   C E N T R E   E S TAT E   P R O V I D I N G 
A S S U R E D   H O S T I N G   S E R V I C E S

63

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Governance 
Audit Committee Report

The Audit Committee Report which describes the work of the 
Committee in the last year. 

• 

reviewing the nature and extent of any non-audit services 
provided by the external Auditor.

Governance

The Committee reports on all such matters to the Board. 

During  the  year  the  Audit  Committee  consisted  of  Jon 
Kempster (who was Chair of the Committee until his resignation 
on 21 July 2022), Alan Aubrey (who replaced Jon Kempster as 
Chair of the Committee on 21 July 2022), and Non-Executive 
Director, Helena Feltham. Following the year end, on 18 July 
2023, Nick Bate was appointed as an interim member of the 
Committee, given Helena’s resignation from the Board on 24 
July 2023.

The Committee meets at least three times a year at appropriate 
intervals in the financial reporting and audit cycle, and at other 
times during the year as agreed between the members of the 
Committee  or  as  required.  The  Executive  Directors  are  not 
members of the Committee but attend Committee meetings 
by  invitation,  as  necessary,  to  facilitate  its  business.  The 
Committee also meets the external auditor at least once a year 
without management present, to discuss their remit and any 
issues arising from the previous audit.

Internal control and risk management 

The Audit Committee supports the Board in reviewing the risk 
management  methodology  and  the  effectiveness  of  internal 
control.  The  Audit  Committee  acknowledges  that  there  is 
a  requirement  for  continuous  improvement  to  the  control 
environment  particularly  following  acquisitions  completed 
by  the  Group  in  the  year  and  as  such,  as  part  of  integration 
of  acquired  businesses,  there  are  ongoing  plans  to  address 
risk and control weaknesses. The Group continues to operate 
a  tiered  hierarchy  for  risk  management,  with  functional 
management  of  direct  risks  and  consistent  measures  across 
all  functions,  and  escalation  of  significant  value  risks,  along 
with  principal  corporate  risks,  to  the  Group’s  corporate  risk 
register.  The corporate risk register is shared and refined with 
the  Audit  Committee  and  Board  at  key  intervals  in  the  year, 
coordinated by the Chief Financial Officer and with reporting 
on mitigating actions for each risk.

During the year, the Committee met four times. Attendance 
details  for  the  regular  scheduled  meetings  are  provided  on 
page 61. 

Key responsibilites

The  Committee’s  terms  of  reference  are  available  on  the 
Investor  section  of  the  Group’s  website.  In  accordance  with 
the terms, the Committee’s responsibilities include:

•  monitoring the integrity of the financial statements of the 
Group,  including  all  formal  announcements  relating  to 
financial performance;

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

reviewing  and  reporting  to  the  Board  on  significant 
financial  reporting  issues  and  judgements  contained  in 
any announcements of financial performance;

reviewing  the  effectiveness  of  internal  financial  controls 
and  internal  control  and  risk  management  systems  and 
the need for an internal audit function;

reviewing  the  adequacy  of  arrangements  for  the  raising 
of  concerns  about  possible  wrongdoing,  procedures 
for  detecting  fraud  and  systems  and  controls  for  the 
prevention of bribery

the  recommendation  of,  appointment,  re-appointment, 
and removal of the external Auditor;

reviewing  the  scope  and  results  of  the  external  annual 
audit  by  the  Auditor,  their  effectiveness,  independence 
and objectivity; 

In  FY23,  having  identified  climate  change  as  a  principal 
risk  for  the  first  time  in  FY22,  there  has  been  an  increase  in 
focus  on  emerging  climate  change  related  risks  with  the 
TCFD  recommendations  being  integrated  into  the  Group’s 
risk  management  framework.  These  risks  are  managed  by 
the  Group’s  newly  formed  Sustainability  Committee,  which 
provides quarterly reports to the Board.

External audit

The  Audit  Committee  approved  the  appointment  and 
remuneration  of  the  external  auditor,  the  Chief  Financial 
Officer  monitors  the  level  and  nature  of  non-audit  services, 
and specific assignments are flagged for approval by the Audit 
Committee as appropriate. The Audit Committee reviews non-
audit  fees  and  considers  implications  for  the  objectivity  and 
independence  of  the  relationship  with  the  external  Auditor. 
The Committee maintains regular dialogue with the external 
auditor on ways to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of 
the external audit process. 

The  responsibilities  of  the  Board  and  external  auditor  in 
connection with the Group’s financial statements are set out 
in  the  Statement  of  Directors’  Responsibilities  and  Auditor’s 
Report  respectively  and  details  of  the  services  provided  by 
and fees payable to the auditor are included in note 8 to the 
Consolidated Financial Statements.

KPMG LLP were appointed as the Group’s Auditor on 15 May 
2017. This is the second year that Christopher Vaulks has been 
the engagement leader.  

64
64

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceAudit Committee Report (continued)  

Financial reporting 

Significant reporting issues and judgements

The  Committee  reviewed  the  full  year  results  including 
the  annual  report  and  accounts,  the  preliminary  results 
announcement  and  the  report  from  the  external  auditor.    In 
reviewing the statements and determining whether they were 
fair, balanced and understandable, the committee considered 
the work and recommendations of management as well as the 
report from the external auditor.  

The Committee considered the appropriateness of accounting 
policies,  critical  accounting  judgements  and  sources  of 
estimation  uncertainty.    To  do  this,  the  Committee  reviewed 
the  information  provided  by  management  and  the  views 
from the external auditors on the accounting treatments and 
judgements in the FY23 financial statements.  

In preparing the FY23 financial statements, there is judgement 
relating  to  the  accounting  treatment  of  two  of  the  business 
combinations, and other judgments involving estimation, that 
could  have  a  material  effect  on  the  amounts  recognised  in 
these financial statements.  These judgements and estimations 
are detailed below. 

The  significant  judgement  made  in  preparing  these  financial 
statements relates to the accounting treatment for the Sungard 
data centres and Sungard consulting business acquisitions as 
a  single  transaction.    Estimates  have  been  made  for  the  fair 
value of the consideration transferred for the Sungard and 4D 
acquisitions,  and  for  the  fair  value  of  intangibles  assets  and 
property, plant and equipment acquired on the same business 
combinations  completed  in  the  year.    Further  information  is 
included in note 2. 

Going concern

The  Committee  have  reviewed  the  reports  and  financial 
models from management on the going concern assumptions 
when considering the FY23 results and the long-term viability 
of the Group.  Internal financial projections and the results of 
stress  testing  the  financial  models  were  taken  into  account, 
with  management  applying  severe  but  plausible  downside 
scenarios.    The  Committee  concluded  that  these  financial 
statements are appropriate to be prepared on a going concern 
basis, and are satisfied with the detail and transparency of the 
basis of preparation disclosure and the judgement involved in 
determining that there is no material uncertainty. 

Alan Aubrey 
Chair of the Audit Committee 
24 August 2023

NEW CYBER SECURITY DIVISION PROTECTING EVERY PART OF OUR 
CUSTOMERS ORGANISATION

65

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement

Introduction 

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 March 2023.  As 
the Company is listed on the Alternative Investment Market (“AIM”), we are required to comply with AIM Rule 19 in respect of 
remuneration disclosures.  However, we also provide additional disclosures to those required by AIM Rule 19 on a voluntary basis, 
in line with AIM best practice, to enable shareholders to better understand and consider our remuneration arrangements.  This 
report is divided into three sections, these being:

• 

• 

• 

This Annual Statement, which summarises the Committee and its work. 

The Remuneration Policy Report, which summarises the Company’s Remuneration Policy; and

The Annual Report on Remuneration, which discloses how the Remuneration Policy was implemented in FY23 in detail and 
how the Policy will operate for FY24.

As  a  Committee,  we  recognise  the  need  to  foster  good  relations  with  our  shareholders  and  encourage  open  dialogue.  
The  Chair  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  is  available  for  discussion  with  institutional  investors  concerning  the  Company’s 
approach to remuneration at any time. We trust you will find this Report to be informative and look forward to receiving your 
support at our forthcoming AGM. 

Alan Aubrey 
Interim Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
24 August 2023

Annual Statement 

Committee members 

During  the  year  the  Remuneration  Committee  was  chaired  by  Helena  Feltham  as  independent  Non-Executive  Director  and 
also consisted of Alan Aubrey (who replaced Jon Kempster on the Committee during the year under review) and Nick Bate. 
Following  the  year  end,  on  18  July  2023,  Alan  Aubrey  was  appointed  interim  chair  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  given 
Helena’s resignation from the Board on 24 July 2023. The Committee meets at least twice a year and at other times during the 
year as agreed between the members of the Committee. The attendance record for the meetings held in the year is included 
on page 50.

Committee responsibilities 

The  Group  is  committed  to  maximising  shareholder  value  over  time.  Each  year  the  Remuneration  Committee  reviews  the 
incentive and reward packages for the Chairman, Executive Directors and senior executives to ensure that they are aligned with 
the  Group’s  strategic  objectives  and  financial  performance,  and  are  appropriate  to  attract,  retain  and  motivate  management 
behaviour in support of the Company’s culture and beliefs and the creation of shareholder value.  The Committee has formal 
terms of reference which can be found in the investor section of the Group’s website.  The Board (excluding the Non-Executive 
Directors) sets the annual base fees payable to the Non-Executive Directors and they do not receive any additional benefits, nor 
are they eligible to participate in any pension or incentive arrangements.

Advisors to the Committee

FIT  Remuneration  Consultants  LLP  was  appointed  to  provide  independent  advice  to  the  Remuneration  Committee  as  and  
when  required  in  respect  of  remuneration  quantum  and  structure  and  developments  in  governance  and  best  practice  more  
generally.    FIT  is  a  member  and  signatory  of  the  Remuneration  Consultants  Group  and  voluntarily  operates  under  
the  Code  of  Conduct  in  relation  to  executive  remuneration  consulting  in  the  UK,  details  of  which  can  be  found  at  
www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.

66
66

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement (continued)

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

This section sets out the Directors’ Remuneration Policy (“Policy”).  In order to deliver the Group’s strategy, the primary objectives 
of our Policy are:

• 

• 

• 

to operate a transparent, simple and effective remuneration structure which encourages the delivery of Group targets in 
accordance with our business plan and strategy;

to attract, motivate and retain the best people of the highest calibre by providing competitive and appropriate short- and 
long-term variable pay which is dependent upon challenging performance conditions; and

to promote the Company’s culture and beliefs and promote the long-term success of the Group and ensure that our policy 
is aligned with the interests of, and feedback from, our shareholders.

Summary of Directors’ Remuneration Policy

Component

Purpose and link to strategy Operation

Maximum Performance

Base salary

To provide a competitive base 
salary to attract, motivate 
and retain directors with the 
experience and capabilities to 
achieve the strategic aims.

Benefits

To provide market-competitive 
benefits package.

Pension

To provide an appropriate 
level of retirement benefit.

Annual 
bonus

LTIP

To reward performance 
against annual targets which 
support the strategic direction 
of Group.

To drive and reward the 
achievement of longer-
term objectives and 
align management with 
shareholders.

Normally reviewed annually after 
considering pay levels at comparably sized 
listed companies and sector peers, the 
performance, role and responsibility of 
each Director, market conditions and the 
Company’s performance and the level of pay 
across the Group as a whole.

Life assurance cover of 4 times salary, private 
medical insurance for themselves, their 
spouse and their children.

Workforce aligned pension which may be 
paid as a pension and/or cash allowance if 
annual or lifetime limits are met.

Cash bonus of up to 50% based on financial 
and strategic targets and a share bonus of up 
to 50% also based on financial and strategic 
targets, paid in the event of exceptional 
performance against targets. 

Conditional shares and/or nil cost or nominal 
cost share options.  Vesting is normally subject 
to the achievement of challenging performance 
conditions, normally over a period of three 
years.  Dividend equivalents may be awarded to 
the extent awards vest.  Awards may be subject 
to malus/clawback provisions at the discretion 
of the Committee.

All-employee 
share awards

To align management with 
employees and shareholders.

Awards will be consistent with prevailing 
HMRC tax favoured all-employee share plans.

Non-
Executive 
Directors

The Committee determines 
the Chairman’s fee.  Fees for 
the Non-Executive Directors 
are agreed by the Chairman 
and Chief Executive.  

Fees are reviewed annually taking into 
account the level of responsibility, relevant 
experience. Fees may include a basic fee and 
additional fees for further responsibilities. Fees 
are normally paid in cash.  Travel and other 
reasonable expenses incurred in the course of 
performing their duties may be reimbursed.

n/a 

n/a

n/a

n/a

Currently 
5% of 
salary

100% of 
salary

200% of 
salary

n/a

Sliding scale 
financial and 
strategic 
targets 

Performance 
metrics will 
be linked 
to financial 
and/or share 
price and/
or strategic 
performance

n/a

Prevailing 
HMRC 
limits

n/a

n/a

67

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement

Service contracts

The details of the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ service contracts and appointment letters are 
summarised below:

Executive Directors

Peter Brotherton 
David Senior

Nick Bate 
Helena Feltham 
Alan Aubrey

Date of appointment

28 November 2016 
3 April 2020

17 November 2021 
7 July 2021 
21 July 2022

Contractual 
notice 
period 
(months)

Length of service 
contract at  
31 March 2023

6 
6

3 
3 
3

6 years 4 months 
2 years 11 months

1 year 4 months 
1 year 8 months 
8 months

The  service  contracts  and  letters  of  appointment  continue  in  force  until  notice  in  writing  is  given  by  either  the  Company  or  
the director.

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy for the year ended 31 March 2023

• 

Salary for the CEO increased to £372,750 from 01 October 2022. Salary for the CFO remained at £200,000 (last increased 
on 1 October 2021);

• 

Executive Directors received a workforce aligned pension at 5% of salary;

• 

• 

Executive Directors received a cash bonus of up to 50%, and although Group EBITDA and Group Net Debt targets were 
missed, as a result of exceeding the Revenue target and good performance against the strategic targets, bonuses of 15% of 
salary for the CEO and 12% of salary for the CFO were awarded in cash for the year ended 31 March 2023; and

Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards were granted to the CEO and CFO in October 2022 over shares with a value equal 
to 200% of salary with the first 100% of salary based on absolute Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) between 5% and 10% 
p.a. and the additional 100% of salary based on stretch absolute TSR targets of 10% to 15% p.a.

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy for the year ending 31 March 2024

• 

The CEO will receive a revised salary of £383,993 and the CFO will receive a revised salary of £220,000, both with effect 
from 01 July 2023;

• 

Pension provision will continue at 5% of salary in line with the workforce provision;

•  Annual cash bonus potential will continue to be capped at 50% of salary for FY24. 80% of the bonus will be payable against 
financial targets and 20% will be based on strategic targets. A share bonus of up to 50% of salary will be payable in the event 
of exceptional performance against financial and strategic targets; and

• 

2023 LTIP awards will be granted to Executive Directors in line with the annual grant policy over shares with a value equal to 
200% of salary with the first 100% of salary based on absolute Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) between 5% and 10% p.a. 
and the additional 100% of salary based on stretch absolute TSR targets of 10% to 15% p.a. Details of the awards will be set 
out in the RNS issued immediately following the grant date.

68
68

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement (continued)

Executive Director’s share awards in the Company  

Details of share options in the Company held by the Directors during the year are as follows:

Peter Brotherton

David Senior

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(e)

(f)

0.1

0.1

0.1

99.9

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

96.1

Exercise 
price 
(p)

Balance,  
31 March  
2022

Granted

Exercised

Balance,  
31 March  
2023

-

242,915

554,326

18,023

621,250

379,267

242,915

554,326

18,023

-

-

-

-

-

621,250

(379,267)

 - 

-

-

-

1,194,531

621,250

(379,267)

1,436,514

100,000

129,555

312,296

-

-

-

-

-

333,334

18,736

(100,000)

-

-

-

-

-

129,555

312,296

333,334

18,736

541,851

352,070

(100,000)

793,921

(a)  The options were granted on 28 June 2019 under the Company’s LTIP. The options vested post the release of the Group’s 
results for the year ended 31 March 2022 following the achievement of performance conditions related to the growth in share 
price and were exercised by the CEO and CFO on 14 September 2022.

(b)  The  options  were  granted  on  8  December  2020  under  the  Company’s  LTIP.  The  options  will  vest  post  the  release  of  the 
Group’s results for the year ended 31 March 2023 subject to the achievement of performance conditions related to the growth 
in share price.

(c)  The  options  were  granted  on  18  November  2021  under  the  Company’s  LTIP.  The  options  will  vest  three  years  from  grant 
subject to absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. 
increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a.  For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR 
of 10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.

(d)  The options were granted on 23 December 2021 under the SAYE option plan under which employees contribute a monthly 
amount  which  is  saved  over  three  years  to  buy  shares.  The  options  are  exercisable  from  1  February  2025.  There  are  no 
performance conditions.

(e)  The options were granted on 12 October 2022 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant subject 
to absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. increasing 
pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a. For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 10% p.a. 
increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.

(f)  The  options  were  granted  on  26th  August  2022  under  the  SAYE  option  plan  under  which  employees  contribute  a  
monthly amount which is saved over 3 years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 01 October 2025. There are no 
performance conditions. 

69

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement (continued)

Annual Report on Remuneration

Single total figure of remuneration for Directors 

The remuneration of the Directors in respect of FY23, with prior year comparatives, was as follows:

Year

Base Salary  
/ Fees

Annual Bonus1

Pension

Share-
based 
payments

£000

£000

£000

£000

Executive

Peter Brotherton

David Senior

Non-Executive Directors

Nick Bate

Helena Feltham

Alan Aubrey

(appointed 21 July 2022)

Former Directors

Jon Kempster 

(resigned 21 July 2022)

Ian Johnson 

(resigned 17 November 2021)

Stephen Vaughan

(resigned 28 April 2021)

Total

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

FY23

FY22

368

328

200

180

85

31

50

37

38

-

25

49

-

54

-

11

766

690

Total

£000

831

863

339

293

85

31

50

37

38

-

25

49

-

54

-

11

54

-

24

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

16

15

11

8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

393 2

520 3

104 4

105 5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

78

-

27

23

497

625

1,368

1,338

1.  The annual bonus plan for FY23 was based on sliding scale Revenue (15%), EBITDA (50%), Group Net Debt (15%) and Strategic 
targets (20%). Although the threshold Group EBITDA and Group Net Debt targets were missed, as a result of exceeding the 
Revenue target and good performance against the strategic targets, bonuses of 15% of salary for the CEO and 12% of salary 
for the CFO were awarded for the year ended 31 March 2023.  As the awards are below the 50% of salary deferral threshold, 
the bonus awards were paid in cash.

2.  On 14 September 2022, Peter Brotherton exercised options over 379,267 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of 103.5 

pence per Ordinary Share resulting in a pre-tax gain of £392,541.

3.  On  23  November  2021  Peter  Brotherton  exercised  options  over  298,879  ordinary  shares  of  0.1p  each  at  a  price  of  £1.24 
resulting in a pre-tax gain of £370,493.  The share-based payments charge for the year includes £149,996 in relation to an 
allotment of shares to Peter Brotherton. The allotment was made for over achievement against bonus targets in the financial 
year ended 31 March 2021 and the allotted shares cannot be sold for a period of 2 years from issue.

4.  On 14 September 2022, David Senior exercised options over 100,000 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of 103.5 pence 

per Ordinary Share resulting in a pre-tax gain of £103,500.

70
70

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Remuneration Report – Annual Statement (continued)

5.  On 23 November 2021 David Senior exercised options over 20,000 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of £1.24 resulting in 
a pre-tax gain of £24,792. The share-based payments charge for the year includes £79,950 in relation to an allotment of shares 
to David Senior. The allotment was made for over achievement against bonus targets in the financial year ended 31 March 
2021 and the allotted shares cannot be sold for a period of 2 years from issue.

Directors’ interests in shares 

The interests (both beneficial and family interests) of the directors in office at the date of this report in the share capital of the 
Company were as follows: 

Executive

Peter Brotherton

David Senior

Non-Executive

Nick Bate

Helena Feltham

Alan Aubrey

Interests in 
ordinary shares at 
31 March 2023

Interests in 
ordinary shares at 
31 March 2022

Interests in share-
based incentive 
options at  
31 March 2023

Interests in share-
based incentive 
options at  
31 March 2022

437,136

106,550

40,000

 -

40,650

438,571

56,550

1,436,514

793,921

1,194,531

541,851

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Relative importance of spend on pay 

The  table  below  shows  the  Group’s  expenditure  on  shareholder  distributions  (including  dividends)  and  total  employee  
pay expenditure. Additional information on the number of employees, total revenue and underlying profit has been provided 
for context.  

Employee expenditure

Distributions to shareholders

Average number of employees

Revenue 

Adjusted EBITDA

Share price 

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

34,479

5,593

588

141,674

24,492

£000

22,851

5,627

486

93,328

23,713

Change

%

50.9%

(0.6%)

21.0%

51.8%

3.3%

The market price of the Company’s shares on 31 March 2023 was 135.00p per share. The highest and lowest market prices during 
the FY23 were 143.50p and 99.99p respectively.

Alan Aubrey 
Interim Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
24 August 2023

71

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Governance 
Directors’ Report 

The Directors presents their annual report together with the audited financial statements for FY23.

Principal activity

The principal activity of the Group during the year was the supply of IT managed services.  The Company is a holding company. 

The Strategic Report on pages 1-27 contains a review of the business, future developments and the principal risks and uncertainties. 

Dividends

A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share is expected to be paid on 19 January 2024, subject to approval at the Company’s 
AGM, to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 8 December 2023 with shares going ex-dividend on 7 December 
2023. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 27 December 2023.  

Substantial shareholders

As at 31 March 2023 and 31 July 2023 (being the latest practicable date before the publication of this report) the Company had 
been notified of the following significant interests in 3% or more in its ordinary shares: 

31 March 2023 
Number

31 March 2023 
%

31 July 2023 
Number

31 July 2023 
%

Kestrel Investment Partners

Lombard Odier Asset Management

ND Capital Investments Ltd

Slater Investments

Harwood Capital

Chelverton Asset Management

29,148,518

25,391,824

24,840,868

18,550,768

17,084,000

7,626,122

18.65%

16.25%

15.90%

11.87%

10.93%

4.88%

30,834,974

25,727,201

24,840,868

18,550,768

17,081,500

5,870,000

As of 31 July 2023, the Company’s issued share capital is 156,263,260 ordinary shares.

19.73%

16.46%

15.90%

11.87%

10.93%

3.76%

Directors and their interests

The following were Directors of Redcentric plc during the year and at the date of approval of these financial statements:

•  Nick Bate 

•  Alan Aubrey (appointed 21 July 2022)

•  Helena Feltham (resigned 24 July 2023)

• 

Peter Brotherton

•  David Senior

• 

Jon Kempster (resigned 21 July 2022)

Details of Directors’ remuneration, service agreements and interests in the share capital of the Company are provided in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 55 to 57. Details of the Directors’ contracts, remuneration and share options granted 
are also set out in the Annual report on remuneration, on page 58 and 59.

All Directors will retire in accordance with the terms of the Articles of Association of the Company and, being eligible, will offer 
themselves for re-election at the forthcoming AGM.

72
72

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Report (continued)

Directors’ indemnities and liability insurance 

As  permitted  by  the  Articles  of  Association,  the  Directors 
have  the  benefit  of  an  indemnity  which  is  a  qualifying  third-
party  indemnity  provision  as  defined  by  Section  234  of  the 
Companies Act 2006. The indemnity was in force throughout 
the last financial year and is currently in force. The Company 
also purchased and maintained Directors’ and Officers’ liability 
insurance throughout the financial year in respect of itself and 
its Directors. 

Employees  

The  Group’s  employment  policies  are  designed  to  ensure 
that  they  meet  the  statutory,  social  and  market  practices 
where  the  Group  operates.  The  Group  systematically 
provides  colleagues  with  information  on  matters  of  concern 
to  them  (including  through  Group-wide  announcements  and 
all  employee  calls),  consulting  them  or  their  representatives 
regularly (including through colleague forums, roadshows, the 
Company’s newsletter and the colleague survey), so that their 
views can be considered when making decisions that are likely 
to affect their interests. Colleague involvement in the Group’s 
performance  is  encouraged  (including  through  employee 
share  schemes  such  as  the  Save  As  You  Earn  Scheme),  as 
achieving a common awareness on the part of all colleagues 
of the financial and economic factors affecting the Group plays 
a major role in maintaining its relationship with its employee.

The Group is committed to employment policies, which follow 
best practice, based on equal opportunities for all colleagues, 
irrespective  of  sex,  race,  colour,  disability  or  marital  status. 
The  Group  gives  full  and  fair  consideration  to  applications 
for employment for disabled persons, having regard to their 
aptitudes and abilities. Appropriate arrangements are made for 
the continued employment and training, career development 
and promotion of disabled persons employed by the Group. 

For further information on our colleagues see pages 23 to 26 
of our Corporate Responsibility statement.

Going concern  

The  Group’s  activities  and  an  outline  of  the  developments 
taking  place  in  relation  to  its  services  and  marketplace 
are  considered  in  the  strategic  report  on  pages  1  to  27.  A 
commentary on the revenue, trading results and cash flows is 
provided in the financial review on pages 7 to 13.

Note  3  to  the  financial  statements  sets  out  the  Group’s 
financial  risks.    The  Group  is  forecast  to  be  profitable  and  is 
cash  generative  with  high  and  continuing  levels  of  recurring 
revenue and high levels of cash conversion expected for the 
foreseeable future.

73

The  consolidated  financial  statements  have  been  prepared 
and approved by the directors in accordance with applicable 
law and UK-adopted international accounting standards.

The  financial  statements  are  prepared  on  a  going  concern 
basis  which  the  Directors  believe  to  be  appropriate  for  the 
following reasons.

The Group meets its day to day working capital requirements 
from operational cash flows, a revolving credit facility, an asset 
financing facility and leasing arrangements (see note 24). 

The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts for a period 
of  at  least  12  months  from  the  date  of  approval  of  these 
financial statements (the “going concern assessment period”) 
which  indicate  that,  taking  account  of  reasonably  possible 
downsides  on  the  operations  and  its  financial  resources,  the 
Group  and  the  Company  will  have  sufficient  funds  to  meet 
their liabilities as they fall due for that period, and will comply 
with debt covenants over that period. 

The Group is required to comply with financial debt covenants 
for adjusted leverage (net debt to adjusted EBITDA), cashflow 
cover  (adjusted  cashflow  to  debt  service,  where  adjusted 
cashflow  is  defined  as  adjusted  EBITDA  less  tax  paid, 
dividend payments, IFRS16 lease repayments and cash capital 
expenditure)  and  provisions  relating  to  guarantor  coverage 
such  that  guarantors  must  exceed  a  prescribed  threshold 
of  the  Group’s  gross  assets,  revenue  and  adjusted  EBITDA. 
The  guarantors  are  Redcentric  plc  and  Redcentric  Solutions 
Limited. Covenants are tested quarterly each year.

Following  the  acquisitions  made  in  the  year,  the  Group  has 
invested  heavily  in  integration  and  efficiency  programmes 
which  are  expected  to  deliver  significant  benefits  to  the 
business  from  FY25  onward.  In  anticipation  of  the  effect 
of  those  investments  on  continued  covenant  compliance, 
in  March  2023  the  Directors  agreed  an  amendment  to  the 
borrowings  facility  agreement  with  the  banking  syndicate 
to  apply  less  stringent  debt  covenant  requirements  for  the 
quarters  ended  March  and  June  2023  and  quarters  ending 
September and December 2023 (see note 24 for details). There 
were no other material changes to the terms and conditions of 
the borrowings because of this amendment. 

The  Directors’  forecasts  in  respect  of  the  going  concern 
assessment  period  have  been  built  from  the  detailed  Board 
approved  budget  for  the  year  ending  31  March  2024  and 
forecasts for the year ending 31 March 2025, and the going 
concern  assessment  takes  account  of  the  updated  debt 
covenant  requirements  agreed  in  the  amended  agreement.  
The  forecasts  include  a  number  of  assumptions  in  relation 
to  order  intake,  renewal  and  churn  rates,  EBITDA  margin 
improvements, capital expenditure requirements to service our 
customers and the full year impact of the further acquisitions 
made  in  FY23  and  associated  synergies  and  efficiencies. 
Revenue assumptions reflect pre-covid levels achieved, which 

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Report (continued)

Going concern  (continued)

have  been  adjusted  for  the  enlarged  customer  base  and 
additional products following the acquisitions made in FY23. 
Both the base case and sensitised forecasts (detailed below) 
include  significant  utilisation  of  the  Group’s  asset  financing 
facility.

Whilst the Group’s trading and cash flow forecasts have been 
prepared  using  current  trading  assumptions,  the  operating 
environment  continues  to  present  several  challenges  which 
could  negatively  impact  the  actual  performance  achieved.  
These risks include, but are not limited to, achieving forecast 
levels of order intake, the impact on customer confidence as 
a result of general economic conditions, inflationary pressures 
driving continued interest rate increases and the achievability 
of actions the Directors consider they would take, and which 
are entirely within their control, should further risks materialise. 

Whilst  cost  inflation  is  an  important  consideration  for  the 
Group,  the  Directors  have  already  taken  positive  action  to 
mitigate  this  issue  in  respect  of  the  Group’s  single  largest 
external  cost  item,  electricity.  The  Group  has  entered  into 
contracts  with  energy  brokers  and  has  agreed  own-use 
commodity prices for a significant proportion of its expected 
FY24 and FY25 electricity volumes, which significantly reduces 
its exposure to price volatility. The Group can flex contracted 
volumes  to  match  expected  usage  volumes  giving  30  days’ 
notice. 

In making their going concern assessment considering these 
risks, the Directors have also modelled a severe but plausible 
downside scenario when preparing the forecasts. 

The severe but plausible downside scenario assumes significant 
economic  downturn  over  FY24  and  into  FY25,  impacting 
forecast  new  order  intake  and  customer  cancellations  for 
recurring  revenue,  reduced  non-recurring  revenue  levels, 
a  reduction  of  synergies  compared  to  forecast  levels,  and 
inflationary pressures driving continued interest rate rises. All 
of  these  downside  scenarios  have  been  combined  into  the 
Board’s severe but plausible assessment.

Under this severe but plausible downside scenario, recurring 
monthly  new  order  intake  is  forecast  to  reduce  by  30%  and 
non-recurring product and services revenues reduce by 20%. 
These reductions have been modelled against the base case 
budget  and  incorporate  both  potential  supply  chain  issues 
and  customer  timing  preferences  which  could  impact  the 
phasing  of  non-recurring  revenues,  and  reduced  investment 
from  our  customer  base  more  generally.  Increased  customer 
cancellation  rates  on  recurring  monthly  revenues  have  also 
been  considered  in  addition  to  expected  benefits  from 

electricity  volume  efficiencies  forecast  in  the  Group’s  data 
centres  being  reduced  by  50%.  Finally,  in  considering  an 
increased cost to the Group of its variable rate revolving credit 
facility  debt,  UK  interest  rates  are  modelled  to  continue  to 
increase by 0.5% per quarter, to a maximum of 7%. 

In  isolation,  each  individual  downside  factor  is  plausible, 
however in order to demonstrate the severity of circumstances 
that would result in the Group coming close to being unable to 
comply with debt covenants, the above scenarios have been 
modelled simultaneously in the severe but plausible downside 
scenario.

The  Directors  note  the  uncertainties  surrounding  the  timing 
and extent of non-recurring revenues from quarter to quarter, 
and  the  timing  and  extent  of  capital  expenditure,  with 
increased  utilisation  of  the  Group’s  asset  financing  facility 
modelled  under  both  the  base  case  budget  and  the  severe 
but  plausible  downside  scenario.  As  a  result,  the  Directors 
continue  to  closely  monitor  quarterly  liquidity  together  with 
debt  covenant  compliance  forecasts.  Under  the  severe  but 
plausible  downside  scenario  outlined  above,  there  is  limited 
covenant  headroom  available  throughout  the  going  concern 
assessment  period.  As  a  result,  the  Directors  expect  that 
the  final  dividend  for  FY23,  which  is  to  be  considered  for 
approval  at  the  AGM  on  28  September  2023,  will  be  paid 
in  the  final  quarter  of  the  financial  year  FY24.  The  cashflow 
forecasts  prepared  and  as  described  above,  include  a  final 
FY23  dividend  payment  in  January  2024  and  the  Directors 
will continue to monitor quarterly liquidity and debt covenant 
compliance and the timing of subsequent dividend payments. 

While  the  Directors  consider  that  the  downside  scenario 
modelled  represents  a  severe  stress,  additional  mitigating 
actions  remain  available  that  have  not  been  modelled 
including the rephasing of non-essential capital expenditure, 
and the rephasing or reduction of certain non-essential costs. 

Under the severe but plausible downside scenario modelled, the 
forecasts  demonstrate  that  the  Group  is  expected  to  maintain 
sufficient  liquidity  and  will  continue  to  comply  with  its  debt 
covenants  throughout  the  going  concern  assessment  period, 
though  covenant  headroom  is  limited  throughout  and  the 
increased utilisation level of the Group’s asset financing facility is 
required to ensure continued compliance with debt covenants.  

The Directors therefore remain confident that the Group and 
parent  Company  have  adequate  resources  to  continue  to 
meet their liabilities as and when they fall due within a period 
of  at  least  12  months  from  the  date  of  approval  of  these 
financial statements, and have therefore prepared the financial 
statements on a going concern basis. 

74
74

Annual Report and Accounts 2023GovernanceDirectors’ Report (continued)

Purchase of own shares 

Corporate governance 

The  authority  to  make  purchases  of  the  Company’s  shares 
on  its  behalf  was  given  by  resolution  of  the  shareholders  at 
the  Company’s  2019  and  2020  AGM,  and  in  September 
2019 the Company announced that it had approved a share 
buyback  programme  of  the  Company’s  ordinary  shares 
for  an  aggregate  purchase  price  of  up  to  £2million  (the 
“Programme”).  The  Company  announced  shortly  after  the 
end of FY20 that the Programme would be temporarily halted 
until such time as the outlook around COVID-19 became more 
certain  and  in  November  2020,  in  the  announcement  of  its 
audited results for the six months to 30 September 2020, the 
Company announced that it would reinstate the Programme. 
During FY22 the Company recommenced the Programme and 
obtained approval from the Board to increase the aggregate 
consideration  payable  under  the  Programme  to  £5  million 
in  total,  resulting  in  a  2,160,500  shares  repurchased  and  a 
closing  balance  of  2,170,203  at  the  end  of  FY22.  No  further 
purchases  were  made  in  FY23,  though  several  share  options 
exercised  during  the  year  were  settled  using  treasury  shares 
meaning  the  number  of  shares  held  in  treasury  at  31  March 
2023 was 728,722.

Annual General Meeting 

The  2023  AGM  will  be  held  at  the  offices  of  finnCap  plc 
at  1  Bartholomew  Close,  London  EC1A  7BL  at  13:30  on 
28  September  2023.  The  notice  convening  the  AGM  and 
what  shareholders  should  do  to  register  their  intention  to 
attend  and/or  vote  by  proxy  are  contained  in  a  separate 
circular  to  shareholders  and  on  the  Group’s  website  at  
https://www.redcentricplc.com/investors/shareholder-
documents/.   

The Group’s statement on corporate governance can be found 
in the Corporate Governance section of this Report and forms 
part of this Directors’ Report and is incorporated by reference.

The Group’s financial risk management objectives and policies 
are described in note 3 to the financial statements.

Disclosure of information to the auditor 

The  Directors  of  the  Company  at  the  date  of  approval  of 
these  financial  statements  confirm,  as  far  as  they  are  aware, 
that there is no relevant audit information of which the auditor 
is  unaware.  The  Directors  have  individually  confirmed  that 
they have taken all reasonable steps that they ought to have 
taken as Directors in order to make themselves aware of any 
relevant  audit  information  and  to  establish  that  it  has  been 
communicated to the auditor.

Subsequent events

There  have  been  no  significant  events  between  the  balance 
sheet  date  and  the  date  of  approval  of  these  accounts.   
Please  refer  to  note  34  for  the  specific  recognition  of 
subsequent events that may have an impact to the readers of 
these accounts. 

By order of the Board

Nick Heron 
Company Secretary 
24 August 2023

75

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Governance 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  preparing  this  Report 
and  the  Group  and  Company  financial  statements  in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.  

Company  law  requires  the  Directors  to  prepare  Group 
and  parent  company  financial  statements  for  each 
financial  year.    Under  the  AIM  Rules  of  the  London 
Stock Exchange they are required to prepare the Group 
financial  statements  in  accordance  with  UK-adopted 
international  accounting  standards  and  applicable  law 
and  they  have  elected  to  prepare  the  parent  Company 
financial  statements  in  accordance  with  UK  accounting 
standards and applicable law, including FRS 101 Reduced  
Disclosure Framework.

Under company law the Directors must not approve the 
financial  statements  unless  they  are  satisfied  that  they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group 
and  parent  company  and  of  the  Group’s  profit  or  loss  
for  that  period.    In  preparing  each  of  the  Group  and 
parent  company  financial  statements,  the  Directors  are 
required to:  

• 

select  suitable  accounting  policies  and  then  apply 
them consistently;  

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  keeping  adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the  parent  company’s  transactions  and  disclose  with 
reasonable  accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial  position 
of  the  parent  Company  and  enable  them  to  ensure  that 
its  financial  statements  comply  with  the  Companies 
Act  2006.    They  are  responsible  for  such  internal 
control  as  they  determine  is  necessary  to  enable  the 
preparation  of  financial  statements  that  are  free  from 
material  misstatement,  whether  due  to  fraud  or  error, 
and  have  general  responsibility  for  taking  such  steps  as 
are  reasonably  open  to  them  to  safeguard  the  assets  
of  the  Group  and  to  prevent  and  detect  fraud  and  
other irregularities.  

Under  applicable  law  and  regulations,  the  directors  are 
also  responsible  for  preparing  a  Strategic  Report  and  
a  Directors’  Report  that  complies  with  that  law  and  
those regulations.  

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity  of  the  corporate  and  financial  information 
included  on  the  Company’s  website.    Legislation  in 
the  UK  governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  
of  financial  statements  may  differ  from  legislation  in  
other jurisdictions.

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, 

relevant, reliable and prudent;  

By order of the Board

• 

• 

• 

• 

for the Group financial statements, state whether they 
have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards;  

Nick Heron 
Company Secretary 
24 August 2023

for  the  parent  company  financial  statements,  state 
whether  applicable  UK  accounting  standards  have 
been  followed,  subject  to  any  material  departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements;  

assess  the  Group  and  parent  company’s  ability  to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, 
matters related to going concern; and  

use the going concern basis of accounting unless they 
either  intend  to  liquidate  the  Group  or  the  parent 
Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.  

76

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsIndependent 
auditor’s report

to the members of Redcentric plc 

1. Our opinion is unmodified 

We have audited the financial statements of Redcentric 
plc (“the Company”) for the year ended 31 March 2023 
which comprise the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income, Consolidated Statement of 
Financial Position, Consolidated Cash Flow Statement, 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, Company 
Balance Sheet, Company Statement of Changes in Equity
and the related notes, including the accounting policies 
in note 1 to both the consolidated financial statements 
and Company financial statements.

In our opinion: 

— the financial statements give a true and fair view of 

the state of the Group’s and of the parent 
Company’s affairs as at 31 March 2023 and of the 
Group’s loss for the year then ended; 

— the Group financial statements have been properly 

prepared in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards;

— the parent Company financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with UK accounting 
standards, including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure 
Framework; and 

— the financial statements have been prepared in 

accordance with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006.

Basis for opinion 

We conducted our audit in accordance with 
International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) 
and applicable law. Our responsibilities are described 
below. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities 
under, and are independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed other entities of public 
interest. We believe that the audit evidence we have 
obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our 
opinion. 

77

Overview

Materiality: 
Group financial 
statements as a whole

Coverage

£1,100,000 (2022: £755,000)

0.8% (2022: 0.8%) of Group Revenue 

96% (2022: 94%) of total profits and 
losses that make up Group 
(loss)/profit before tax

Key audit matters                                                                 vs 2022

▲

◄►

◄►

▲

New risks

Going concern

Recurring risks

Revenue recognition 

Event driven

Recoverability of parent 
Company’s investment in 
subsidiaries

New: Valuation of 
intangible assets acquired 
in the Sungard and 4D Data 
Centres acquisitions and 
valuation of certain 
property, plant and 
equipment acquired as part 
of the Sungard business 
combination

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statements2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those 
which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our 
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. In arriving at our audit opinion above, the key audit matters, 
in decreasing order of audit significance, were as follows:

Going concern 
(Group and parent 
Company)

See Note 1.1 to the 
Group financial 
statements

Refer to pages 73-74 
(Directors’ Report) 
and page 65 (Audit 
Committee Report)

The risk

Disclosure quality

The financial statements explain how the 
Board has formed a judgement that it is 
appropriate to adopt the going concern basis 
of preparation for the Group and parent 
Company.

That judgement is based on an evaluation of 
the inherent risks to the Group’s and 
Company’s business model and how those 
risks might affect the Group’s and Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue 
operations over a period of at least a year 
from the date of approval of the financial 
statements. 

The risks most likely to adversely affect the 
Group’s and Company’s available financial 
resources and/or metrics relevant to debt 
covenants over this period were: 

•

The timing and extent of cash outflows 
relating to dividends and capital 
expenditure and their resulting impacts 
on the Group’s debt covenant 
compliance;

• A reduction in non-recurring revenues 
as a result of supply chain issues or loss 
of customer confidence and 
uncertainties over the timing and extent 
of non-recurring revenues from quarter 
to quarter; 

•

•

The inability to achieve the growth and 
new order intake targets in the Group’s 
base case forecasts; 

The failure to achieve forecast energy 
efficiencies; 

• Adverse impacts from inflationary 

pressures, such as interest rates; and

•

The inability to utilise the Group’s asset 
financing facility to fund certain items of 
capital expenditure. 

There are also less predictable but realistic 
second order impacts, such as the erosion of 
customer confidence resulting in increased 
cancellation rates for recurring revenues, 
which could result in a rapid reduction of 
available financial resources.

The risk for our audit was whether or not 
those risks were such that they amounted to a 
material uncertainty that may have cast 
significant doubt about the ability to continue 
as a going concern.  Had they been such, then 
that fact would have been required to have 
been disclosed.  

Our response

We considered whether these risks could plausibly affect the 
liquidity or covenant compliance in the going concern period by 
assessing the directors’ sensitivities over the level of available 
financial resources and covenant thresholds indicated by the 
Group’s financial forecasts taking account of severe, but plausible, 
adverse effects that could arise from these risks individually and 
collectively.
Our procedures also included:

— Funding assessment: we read the revolving credit facility (RCF) 
agreement and amendment letter to understand the terms, 
including covenant requirements. We reperformed the key 
financial covenants calculations for 30 September 2023, 31 
December 2023, 30 March 2024 and 30 June 2024 assessing 
compliance at these dates. We considered the adjustments 
made in the adjusted cashflow and adjusted EBITDA for the 
covenant calculations, considering the appropriateness 
compared to the loan agreements and historical accepted 
practice with the lenders. 

— Historical comparisons: we assessed the ability of the Group 
to accurately forecast by comparing historical results to 
forecasts for key metrics. We assessed the most recent years’ 
performance against budgets, and challenged the assumptions 
over the going concern period based on historical 
performance. 

— Test of detail: we critically assessed the cash flow forecasts by 
considering the appropriateness of key assumptions used in 
preparing those projections, with a focus on revenue growth, 
cost inflation and energy efficiency assumptions and the 
timing and extent of cashflows, including capital expenditure 
and dividend payments. We evaluated these via enquiries with 
the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, and 
inspected the forecasts and associated papers. 

— Our sector experience: we assessed the projections and 

assumptions by reference to our knowledge of the business 
and general market conditions including the potential risk of 
management bias. 

— Sensitivity analysis: we critically challenged the downside 

sensitivities assessing whether these represented severe but 
plausible scenarios based on our knowledge of the business 
and considering the most recent trading results. We also 
challenged the mitigating actions, to identify whether these 
were reasonable, achievable and within the control of the 
Group. 

— Evaluating directors’ intent: we evaluated the achievability of 
the actions the directors have modelled in the base case and 
severe but plausible downside scenario, including the 
increased utilisation of the Group’s asset financing facility and 
the timing of dividend payments, taking into account the 
extent to which the directors can control the timing and 
outcome of these. We obtained written representations from 
the directors with regards to the adequacy of the going 
concern disclosure, and the timing and evaluation of capital 
expenditure and dividend payments. 

— Assessing transparency: we assessed whether the matters 
included in the going concern disclosure give a full and 
accurate description of the directors’ assessment, including 
the judgements made, identified risks and mitigating actions.

78

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsValuation of intangible assets 
acquired in the Sungard and 4D Data 
Centres acquisitions and valuation of 
certain property, plant and 
equipment acquired as part of the 
Sungard business combination

(Valuation of intangible assets 
acquired (including goodwill): £23.5 
million)

(Valuation of certain property, plant 
and equipment acquired as part of  
total property, plant and equipment  
acquired in the Sungard business 
combination: £9.6 million)

Refer to page 65 (Audit Committee 
Report), page 92 (accounting policy), 
page 97 critical accounting 
judgements, key sources of estimation 
uncertainty and other areas of 
estimation) and pages 124-126
(financial disclosures)

The risk

Our response

Subjective estimate and valuation

During the year the Group acquired certain 
business and assets relating to three data 
centres, and a consulting business, from 
Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in 
administration) (‘Sungard’). The Group also 
completed the acquisition of 4D Data 
Centres Limited (‘4D’).

The Group has performed fair value 
assessments of the identified acquired 
intangible assets arising from these business 
combinations. The assessment of the fair 
value of intangible assets acquired in each 
business combination involves estimation 
uncertainty, including forecasting future 
performance on a market participant basis. 

As at the date of the acquisitions, there was 
a high degree of subjectivity in assessing 
certain assumptions applied by the Group in 
the discounted cash flow models used to 
calculate the acquisition date fair value of 
these assets, including discount rates, EBIT 
growth and customer attrition rates.

The Group has also performed fair value 
assessments of the acquired tangible assets, 
including the property, plant and equipment 
acquired in the acquisitions of the data 
centres from Sungard.  

As at the date of the acquisition, there was a 
high degree of subjectivity in assessing 
certain assumptions applied by the Group in 
establishing the depreciated replacement 
cost and resulting fair values for the 
property, plant and equipment acquired, 
including replacement costs, useful 
economic lives and utilisation levels.

The effect of these matters is that, as part of 
our risk assessment, we determined that the 
valuation of intangible assets acquired in 
the Sungard and 4D Data Centres 
acquisitions and the valuation of certain 
property, plant and equipment acquired in 
the Sungard business combination has a 
high degree of estimation uncertainty, with 
a potential range of reasonable outcomes 
greater than our materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole.

We performed the tests below rather than seeking 
to rely on any of the Group’s controls because the 
nature of the balance is such that we would expect 
to obtain audit evidence primarily through the 
detailed procedures described.

Our procedures included: 

— Test of detail: we inspected the purchase 
agreements, board minutes and market 
announcements and assessed whether firstly, 
the purchase price allocation accounting 
reflected these documents, as well as comparing 
the intangible and tangible assets identified by 
management to our understanding of the 
rationale for the purchase based on our 
inspection of these documents. 

— Assessment of experts: we assessed the 

competence, capabilities and objectivity of the 
external valuation experts engaged by the 
Group to assist in valuing the intangible assets 
and property, plant and equipment acquired by 
performing independent research on the 
qualifications and experience of management’s 
expert, and evaluating the engagement terms. 

— Our valuation expertise: we involved our own 
valuation specialists to assist us in assessing the 
appropriateness of the valuation methodologies 
applied for the intangible assets acquired in the 
Sungard and 4D acquisitions and the valuation 
of property, plant and equipment acquired with 
the Hounslow data centre from Sungard. Our 
specialists assisted in challenging the key 
assumptions used such as discount rate, growth 
and customer attrition rates for intangible 
assets, and replacement costs, useful economic 
lives and utilisation levels for property, plant 
and equipment. 

— Benchmarking assumptions: we challenged the 
discount rate, EBIT growth rate and useful 
economic lives by comparing to internally and 
externally derived data.

— Physical inspection: we performed a site visit to 

the largest data centre of the Sungard 
acquisition which comprised the majority of the 
fair value of acquired property, plant and 
equipment and we observed the existence of 
the major asset categories included in the 
property, plant and equipment valuation. 

— Assessing transparency: we considered the 

adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in respect 
of the valuation of the identified intangible 
assets and property, plant and equipment 
acquired, including the extent of estimation 
uncertainty and key assumptions applied in the 
valuation methodologies. 

79

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsThe risk

Our response

Revenue recognition 

Revenue recognition cut-off

(£141.7 million; 2022: £93.3 
million)

Refer to pages 89-91 
(accounting policy) and page 
99 (financial disclosures)

We identified potential incentives and 
pressures on the Directors relating to 
investor expectations, compliance with 
debt covenants and the achievement of 
bonus targets which increase the risk of 
fraudulent revenue recognition.

Results for any given financial reporting 
period are expected to be affected by the 
revenue recognition policies in place, 
particularly for the Group’s recurring 
revenue stream which represents 90.6% of 
total revenues, and the accurate accrual 
and deferral of related amounts at the 
year-end. There is a risk that amounts 
recorded in recurring revenue could be 
subject to manipulation, particularly 
through the inappropriate accrual and 
deferral of revenue amounts at the year 
end. 

This is particularly the case for the Group’s 
recurring revenue stream, where there are 
manual aspects of the revenue recognition 
process, particularly relating to the accrual 
and deferral of revenue amounts, which 
provide an opportunity for manipulation. 

There is a resulting risk that revenue 
transactions around the year end could be 
fraudulently recorded, such that revenue is 
not recognised in line with relevant 
accounting standards, and in particular that 
accrued and deferred income recorded at 
the year end do not exist or are 
incomplete.



We performed the detailed tests below rather than seeking 
to rely on any of the Group's controls because our 
knowledge of the design of these controls indicated that we 
would not be able to obtain the required evidence to 
support reliance on controls. Our procedures included:

— Tests of detail: 







for a sample of revenue transactions recognised one 
month either side of the balance sheet date, we 
assessed whether revenue was recognised in the 
appropriate period by comparing to supporting 
documentation such as invoices, contracts and customer 
correspondence;

for a sample of credit notes raised in the two months 
after the balance sheet date, we assessed whether the 
credit note related to revenue recognised in the year 
and if this was indicative of inappropriate revenue 
recognition through inquiry and inspection of source 
documentation;

for a sample of customer balances, we assessed the 
appropriateness of deferred and accrued income at the 
year-end through inspection of contracts, invoices, 
customer correspondence and recalculations; 

 we assessed the year-end bank reconciliations, and 

obtained bank confirmations to obtain audit evidence 
over the Group’s cash balance and to assess the 
appropriateness of any significant reconciling items as 
such items may be indicative of inappropriate revenue 
recognition; and

for unexpected revenue journal postings (where the 
opposite side of the journal was posted to an account 
which would not be expected based on our 
understanding of business processes and transaction 
flows), we assessed the nature of the posting and 
obtained supporting documentation where available.

— Assessing transparency: we considered the adequacy of 

the Group’s disclosures in respect of revenue 
recognition policies and the timing of revenue 
recognition.

Recoverability of parent 
Company’s investment in 
subsidiaries

(£105.1 million; 2022: £104.1 
million)

Low risk, high value

The carrying amount of the parent 
Company’s investments in subsidiaries 
represents 100% (2022: 100%) of the 
Company’s total assets. 

Refer to page 134 (accounting 
policy) and pages 136-137 
(financial disclosures)

Their recoverability is not at a high risk of 
significant misstatement or subject to 
significant judgement. However, due to 
their materiality in the context of the 
parent Company financial statements, this 
is considered to be the area that had the 
greatest effect on our overall parent 
Company audit.

We performed the tests below rather than seeking to rely 
on any of the Company’s controls because the nature of the 
balance is such that we would expect to obtain audit 
evidence primarily through the detailed procedures 
described.

Our procedures included: 

— Test of detail: we compared the carrying amount of 

investments with an estimate of value in use based on 
forecast future cashflows, assessing the sensitivity of 
the resulting headroom to reasonably possible changes 
in assumptions.

— Comparing valuations: We compared the carrying 

amount of the Parent Company’s investments to the 
Group’s market capitalisation.

80

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statements3. Our application of materiality and an overview of 

the scope of our audit 

Total revenue
£141.7m (2022: £93.3m)

Group materiality
£1,100,000 (2022: £755,000)

Materiality for the Group financial statements as a 
whole was set at £1,100,000 (2022: £755,000), 
determined with reference to a benchmark of total 
revenue of £141.7 million (2022: £93.3 million), of 
which it represents 0.8% (2022: 0.8%). We consider 
total revenue to be the most appropriate benchmark 
as it provides a more stable measure year on year 
than group profit before tax, and is reflective of the 
size and complexity of the Group.

Materiality for the parent Company financial 
statements as a whole was set at £522,000 (2022: 
£514,000), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of parent Company total assets, of which 
it represents 0.5% (2022: 0.5%).

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures 
on individual account balances and disclosures were 
performed to a lower threshold, performance 
materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable level the 
risk that individually immaterial misstatements in 
individual account balances add up to a material 
amount across the financial statements as a whole. 

Performance materiality was set at 65% (2022: 65%) 
of materiality for the financial statements as a whole, 
which equates to £715,000 (2022: £490,000) for the 
Group and £339,000 (2022: £334,000) for the parent 
Company. We applied this percentage in our 
determination of performance materiality based on 
the level of identified misstatements and control 
deficiencies during the prior period.

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any 
corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements 
exceeding £55,000 (2022: £37,750), in addition to 
other identified misstatements that warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.

Of the Group’s 6 (2022: 6) reporting components, we 
subjected 1 (2022: 1) to full scope audits for group 
purposes and 1 (2022: 0) to specified risk-focused 
audit procedures. The latter was not financially 
significant enough to require a full scope audit for 
group purposes, but did present specific individual 
risks that needed to be addressed.

The components within the scope of our work 
accounted for the percentages illustrated opposite. 

For the residual 4 (2022: 5) components, we 
performed analysis at an aggregated group level to 
re-examine our assessment that there were no 
significant risks of material misstatement within 
these.

The work on the 2 (2022: 1) components, and the 
audit of the parent Company, was performed by the 
Group team. Component materialities ranged from 
£388,000 to £800,000 (2022: £612,000), having 
regard to the mix of size and risk profile of the Group 
across the components.

The scope of the audit work performed was 
predominately substantive as we placed limited 
reliance upon the Group's internal control over 
financial reporting.

£1.1m
Whole financial
statements materiality (2022: 
£0.75m)

£0.715m
Whole financial
statements performance 
materiality (2022: £0.49m)

£0.8m
Range of materiality at 2 
components £0.39m-£0.8m 
(2022: at 1 component £0.61m)

£55,000
Misstatements reported to the 
audit committee (2022: £37,750)

Total revenue
Group materiality

Group revenue

Total profits and losses that make 
up group (loss)/profit before tax

9

96%

(2022: 94%)

94

87

3

99%

(2022: 95%)

95

96

Group total assets 

100%

(2022: 99%)

99

100

Key: 

Full scope for group audit purposes 2023

Specified risk-focused audit procedures 2023

Full scope for group audit purposes 2022

Residual components

81

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statements4. Going concern

The directors have prepared the financial statements on the going 
concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the Group or the 
Company or to cease their operations, and as they have concluded 
that the Group’s and the Company’s financial position means that this 
is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no material 
uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt over their ability 
to continue as a going concern for at least a year from the date of 
approval of the financial statements (“the going concern period”).  

An explanation of how we evaluated management’s assessment of 
going concern is set out in the related key audit matter in section 2 of 
this report.

Our conclusions based on this work:

— we consider that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of 
accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is 
appropriate;

— we have not identified, and concur with the directors’ assessment 
that there is not, a material uncertainty related to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant 
doubt on the Group’s or Company's ability to continue as a going 
concern for the going concern period; and

— we found the going concern disclosure in note 1.1 to be 

acceptable.

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as 
subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent with 
judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, the 
above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group or the 
Company will continue in operation. 

5. Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to 
fraud

To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) 
we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive or 
pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit fraud. 
Our risk assessment procedures included:

— Enquiring of directors and the Audit Committee, and inspection of 
policy documentation as to the Group’s high-level policies and 
procedures to prevent and detect fraud, as well as whether they 
have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud;

— Reading Board, Audit Committee, and Remuneration Committee 

minutes;

— Considering remuneration incentive schemes and performance 

targets for management; and

— Using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected 

relationships.

We communicated identified fraud risks throughout the audit team 
and remained alert to any indications of fraud throughout the audit.

As required by auditing standards, and taking into account possible 
pressures to meet profit targets in a given year, we perform 
procedures to address the risk of management override of controls 
and the risk of fraudulent revenue recognition, in particular the risk 
that Group management may be in a position to make inappropriate 
accounting entries; and the risk that revenue is overstated or 
understated through recording revenues in the wrong period. 

We did not identify any additional fraud risks. 

Further detail in respect of the revenue recognition cut-off risk is set 
out in the key audit matter disclosures in section 2 of this report.

We performed procedures including: 

— Identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test based on 

certain risk criteria, and comparing the identified entries to 
supporting documentation. This included those journals with 
unexpected account pairings or posted to seldom used accounts;

82

— Assessing if any bias is present in significant management 
judgements in relation to the accounting for the Sungard 
business combinations as a single transaction; 

— Assessing significant accounting estimates for bias;

— Evaluating the business purpose of significant unusual 

transactions; and

— Performing procedures over revenue recognition as disclosed 

in section 2 of this report.

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement 
related to compliance with laws and regulations

We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably 
be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements 
from our general commercial and sector experience and through 
discussion with the directors and other management (as required 
by auditing standards), and from inspection of the Group’s legal 
correspondence and discussed with the directors and other 
management the policies and procedures regarding compliance 
with laws and regulations.  

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout 
our team and remained alert to any indications of non-
compliance throughout the audit. 

The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the financial 
statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group is subject to laws and regulations that directly 
affect the financial statements including financial reporting 
legislation (including related companies legislation), distributable 
profits legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the 
extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part of 
our procedures on the related financial statement items.  

Secondly, the Group is subject to many other laws and 
regulations where the consequences of non-compliance could 
have a material effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial 
statements, for instance through the imposition of fines or 
litigation. We identified the following areas as those most likely 
to have such an effect: health and safety, anti-bribery and 
corruption, employment law, data protection regulations, 
environmental protection legislation and contract legislation. 
Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures to identify 
non-compliance with these laws and regulations to enquiry of 
the directors and other management and inspection of legal 
correspondence, if any. Therefore if a breach of operational 
regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from relevant 
correspondence, an audit will not detect that breach.

We discussed with the audit committee matters related to actual 
or suspected breaches of laws or regulations, for which 
disclosure is not necessary, and considered any implications for 
our audit.

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of 
law or regulation

Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an 
unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material 
misstatements in the financial statements, even though we have 
properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with 
auditing standards. For example, the further removed non-
compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and 
transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely 
the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards 
would identify it.  

In addition, as with any audit, there remained a higher risk of 
non-detection of fraud, as these may involve collusion, forgery, 
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of 
internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect 
material misstatement. We are not responsible for preventing 
non-compliance or fraud and cannot be expected to detect non-
compliance with all laws and regulations.

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statements6. We have nothing to report on the other information in the 

Auditor’s responsibilities 

Annual Report

The directors are responsible for the other information 
presented in the Annual Report together with the financial 
statements. Our opinion on the financial statements does not 
cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express 
an audit opinion or, except as explicitly stated below, any form of 
assurance conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether, based on our financial statements audit 
work, the information therein is materially misstated or 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our audit 
knowledge. Based solely on that work we have not identified 
material misstatements in the other information.
Strategic report and directors’ report 

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our 
opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high 
level of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the 
economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial 
statements. 

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

9. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe our 

Based solely on our work on the other information: 

responsibilities

— we have not identified material misstatements in the 

strategic report and the directors’ report; 

— in our opinion the information given in those reports for the 
financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and 

— in our opinion those reports have been prepared in 

accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 

7.  We have nothing to report on the other matters on which we 

are required to report by exception 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, 
in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might 
state to the Company’s members those matters we are required 
to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. 
To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or 
assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this 
report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Christopher Vaulks (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants 

Quayside House
110 Quayside
Newcastle upon Tyne
Tyne and Wear
NE1 3DX

24 August 2023

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you 
if, in our opinion: 

— adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 

parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited by us; or 

— the parent Company financial statements are not in 

agreement with the accounting records and 
returns; or 

— certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by 

law are not made; or 

— we have not received all the information and explanations 

we require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

8. Respective responsibilities 

Directors’ responsibilities 

As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 76, 
the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial 
statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing 
the Group and, parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 
concern; and using the going concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company 
or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do 
so. 

83

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsConsolidated statement of comprehensive income   
for the year ended 31 March 2023

Year ended 
31 March 
2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March  
2022  
£000

Note

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross Profit

Operating costs

Other operating income

Adjusted EBITDA1

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangibles

Depreciation of right of use assets

Exceptional items

Share-based payments

Operating (loss)/profit

Finance income

Finance costs

(Loss)/profit before taxation

Income tax credit

(Loss)/profit for the period attributable to owners of the parent

Other comprehensive income

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:

Currency translation differences

Deferred tax movement on share options

Total comprehensive (loss)/profit for the period

Earnings per share

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

6

7

16

15

17

9

28

10

12

13

13

141,674

(40,763)

100,911

(109,938)

88

24,492

(4,636)

(8,773)

(10,617)

(8,149)

(1,256)

93,328

(33,778) 

59,550

(53,046) 

103

23,713

(2,745)

(6,973)

(4,578)

(1,629)

(1,181)

(8,939)

6,607

-

(3,530)

(12,469)

3,219

(9,250)

(97)

47

(9,300)

(5.94p)

(5.94p)

-

(1,071) 

5,536

1,404

6,940

(26)

58

6,972

4.43p 

4.36p 

 The notes on pages 88 to 131 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

1 For an explanation and reconciliation of the alternative performance measures used in this report, please refer to page 20.

84

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsConsolidated statement of financial position   
as at 31 March 2023

Note

31 March 2023 
£000

31 March 2022  
£000

Non-Current Assets

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Deferred tax asset

Current Assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Corporation tax receivable

Cash and cash equivalents

Total Assets

Current Liabilities

Trade and other payables

Corporation tax payable

Bank and term loans

Lease liabilities

Provisions

Contingent consideration

Non-Current Liabilities

Bank and term loans

Lease liabilities

Provisions

Total Liabilities

Net Assets

Equity

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Common control reserve

Own shares held in treasury

Retained earnings

Total Equity

15

16

17

18

19

20

22

24

24

26

23

24

24

26

27

27

27

83,217

17,131

46,282

1,076

147,706

3,716

39,254

48

1,366

44,384

192,090

(43,578)

-

(475)

(10,804)

(1,841)

(2,990)

(59,688)

(33,651)

(29,400)

(11,160)

(74,211)

(133,899)

58,191

157

73,267

(9,454)

(898)

(4,881)

58,191

67,726

5,372

17,038

3,999

94,135

1,393

22,123

-

1,804

25,320

119,455

(24,053) 

(800) 

(508) 

(4,086) 

- 

(422)

(29,869) 

(496) 

(13,359) 

(3,883) 

(17,738) 

(47,607) 

71,848

157

73,267

(9,454) 

(2,673) 

10,551

71,848

The notes on pages 88 to 131 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements of Redcentric Plc (Registration Number 08397584) on pages 84 to 87, and the notes to these financial 
statements on pages 88 to 131 were approved by the Board on 24 August 2023 and are signed on its behalf by:

David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer

85

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsConsolidated cash flow statement    
for the year ended 31 March 2023

(Loss)/profit before taxation

Finance costs

Operating (loss)/profit

Adjustment for non-cash items

Depreciation and amortisation

Exceptional items

Share-based payments

Operating cash flow before exceptional items and movements in working capital

Transfer from intangible assets to cost of sales

Non-cash provision movements 

Cash costs of exceptional items

Operating cash flow before changes in working capital

Changes in working capital

Increase in inventories

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operations

Tax (paid)/received

Net cash generated from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Disposal of non-core contracts

Acquisition of subsidiaries (net of cash acquired)

Purchase of intangible fixed assets

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Dividends paid

Share buyback

Disposal of treasury shares on exercise of share options

Cash received on exercise of share options

Sale and leaseback of fixed assets

Interest paid

Interest paid on leases

Repayment of leases

Repayment of term loans

Drawdown of borrowings

Repayment of borrowings 

Payment of loan arrangement fees

Issue of shares

Net cash used in financing activities

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Effect of exchange rates

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the period

Note

10

15,16,17

9

28

9

14

27

24

24

24

24

Year ended 
31 March 
2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March  
2022  
£000

(12,469)

3,530

(8,939)

24,026

8,149

1,256

24,492

-

-

(8,258)

16,234

(2,324)

(15,463)

16,377

14,824

(670)

14,154

5,536

1,071

6,607

14,296

1,629

1,181

23,713

140

(577)

(2,091) 

21,185

(185) 

559

(4,391)

17,168

246 

17,414

(5,505)

-

(2,264)

5,750

(26,606)

(10,422)

(869)

(32,980)

(5,593)

-

229

-

966

(1,771)

(1,218)

(6,901)

(508)

55,500

(21,500)

(713)

-

(501)

(7,437)

(5,627)

(2,666)

-

12

-

(97)

(839)

(3,745)

(487)

4,500

(4,500)

-

1

18,491

(13,448)

(335)

1,804

(103)

1,366

(3,471) 

5,250

25

1,804

The notes on pages 88 to 131 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

86

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsConsolidated statement of changes in equity    
for the year ended 31 March 2023

Share 
capital

Share 
premium

Common 
control 
 reserve

Own 
shares held 
in treasury 

Retained 
earnings

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

1 April 2021 

Profit for the period

Transactions with owners

Share-based payments

Share buyback

Issue of new shares

Dividends paid

Share option exercises

Other comprehensive income

Deferred tax movement on share options

Currency translation differences

At 31 March 2022 

Loss for the period

Transactions with owners

Share-based payments

Share buyback

Issue of new shares

Dividends paid (note 14)

Share option exercises

Deferred tax relating to prior periods 

Other comprehensive income

Deferred tax movement on share options

Currency translation differences

156

73,267

(9,454) 

(32) 

-

-

-

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(2,666)

-

-

25

-

-

Total 
equity

£000

72,090

6,940

1,067

(2,666)

1

8,153

6,940

1,067

-

-

(5,627)

(5,627) 

(14) 

11

58

(26) 

58

(26) 

157

73,267

(9,454) 

(2,673) 

10,551

71,848

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,775

-

-

-

(9,250)

(9,250)

1,044

1,044

-

-

(5,593)

(1,546)

(37)

47

(97)

-

-

(5,593)

229

(37)

47

(97)

At 31 March 2023

157

73,267

(9,454)

(898)

(4,881)

58,191

The notes on pages 88 to 131 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

87

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023

Summary of significant accounting policies

Redcentric plc is a public limited company incorporated and 
domiciled in England and Wales, whose shares are publicly 
traded  on  the  AIM  division  of  the  London  Stock  Exchange. 
Redcentric  plc  was  incorporated  on  11  February  2013  and 
admitted to AIM on 24 April 2013. 

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation 
of these consolidated financial statements are set out below. 
These policies have been applied consistently in the current 
and prior period.

These financial statements are presented in pound sterling, 
being the currency of the primary economic environment in 
which the Group operates.

The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost 
basis except that contingent consideration is measured at fair 
value.

1.1 Basis of preparation

The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis 
which the Directors believe to be appropriate for the following 
reasons.

The Group meets its day to day working capital requirements 
from operational cash flows, a revolving credit facility, an asset 
financing facility and leasing arrangements (see note 24). 

The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts for a period of 
at least 12 months from the date of approval of these financial 
statements  (the  “going  concern  assessment  period”)  which 
indicate that, taking account of reasonably possible downsides 
on  the  operations  and  its  financial  resources,  the  Group  and 
the Company will have sufficient funds to meet their liabilities 
as  they  fall  due  for  that  period,  and  will  comply  with  debt 
covenants over that period. 

The Group is required to comply with financial debt covenants for 
adjusted leverage (net debt to adjusted EBITDA), cashflow cover 
(adjusted cashflow to debt service, where adjusted cashflow is 
defined as adjusted EBITDA less tax paid, dividend payments, 
IFRS16  lease  repayments  and  cash  capital  expenditure)  and 
provisions relating to guarantor coverage such that guarantors 
must exceed a prescribed threshold of the Group’s gross assets, 
revenue and adjusted EBITDA. The guarantors are Redcentric 
plc  and  Redcentric  Solutions  Limited.  Covenants  are  tested 
quarterly each year.

Following  the  acquisitions  made  in  the  year,  the  Group  has 
invested heavily in integration and efficiency programmes which 
are expected to deliver significant benefits to the business from 
FY25 onward. In anticipation of the effect of those investments 
on continued covenant compliance, in March 2023 the Directors 
agreed  an  amendment  to  the  borrowings  facility  agreement 
with the banking syndicate to apply less stringent debt covenant 

requirements for the quarters ended March and June 2023 and 
quarters ending September and December 2023 (see note 24 
for details). There were no other material changes to the terms 
and conditions of the borrowings because of this amendment. 

The  Directors’  forecasts  in  respect  of  the  going  concern 
assessment  period  have  been  built  from  the  detailed  Board 
approved  budget  for  the  year  ending  31  March  2024  and 
forecasts  for  the  year  ending  31  March  2025,  and  the  going 
concern  assessment  takes  account  of  the  updated  debt 
covenant requirements agreed in the amended agreement.  The 
forecasts include a number of assumptions in relation to order 
intake, renewal and churn rates, EBITDA margin improvements, 
capital expenditure requirements to service our customers and 
the full year impact of the further acquisitions made in FY23 and 
associated  synergies  and  efficiencies.  Revenue  assumptions 
reflect pre-covid levels achieved, which have been adjusted for 
the enlarged customer base and additional products following 
the acquisitions made in FY23. Both the base case and sensitised 
forecasts  (detailed  below)  include  significant  utilisation  of  the 
Group’s asset financing facility.

Whilst the Group’s trading and cash flow forecasts have been 
prepared  using  current  trading  assumptions,  the  operating 
environment  continues  to  present  several  challenges  which 
could  negatively  impact  the  actual  performance  achieved.  
These  risks  include,  but  are  not  limited  to,  achieving  forecast 
levels  of  order  intake,  the  impact  on  customer  confidence  as 
a result of general economic conditions, inflationary pressures 
driving  continued  interest  rate  increases  and  the  achievability 
of  actions  the  Directors  consider  they  would  take,  and  which 
are entirely within their control, should further risks materialise. 

Whilst cost inflation is an important consideration for the Group, 
the  Directors  have  already  taken  positive  action  to  mitigate 
this issue in respect of the Group’s single largest external cost 
item,  electricity.  The  Group  has  entered  into  contracts  with 
energy  brokers  and  has  agreed  own-use  commodity  prices 
for  a  significant  proportion  of  its  expected  FY24  and  FY25 
electricity volumes, which significantly reduces its exposure to 
price volatility. The Group can flex contracted volumes to match 
expected usage volumes giving 30 days’ notice. 

In  making  their  going  concern  assessment  considering  these 
risks, the Directors have also modelled a severe but plausible 
downside scenario when preparing the forecasts. 

The severe but plausible downside scenario assumes significant 
economic  downturn  over  FY24  and  into  FY25,  impacting 
forecast  new  order  intake  and  customer  cancellations  for 
recurring  revenue,  reduced  non-recurring  revenue  levels, 
a  reduction  of  synergies  compared  to  forecast  levels,  and 
inflationary pressures driving continued interest rate rises. All of 
these downside scenarios have been combined into the Board’s 
severe but plausible assessment.

88

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.1 Basis of preparation (continued)

Under this severe but plausible downside scenario, recurring 
monthly new order intake is forecast to reduce by 30% and 
non-recurring product and services revenues reduce by 20%. 
These reductions have been modelled against the base case 
budget  and  incorporate  both  potential  supply  chain  issues 
and  customer  timing  preferences  which  could  impact  the 
phasing of non-recurring revenues, and reduced investment 
from our customer base more generally. Increased customer 
cancellation  rates  on  recurring  monthly  revenues  have  also 
been  considered  in  addition  to  expected  benefits  from 
electricity  volume  efficiencies  forecast  in  the  Group’s  data 
centres  being  reduced  by  50%.  Finally,  in  considering  an 
increased  cost  to  the  Group  of  its  variable  rate  revolving 
credit facility debt, UK interest rates are modelled to continue 
to increase by 0.5% per quarter, to a maximum of 7%. 

In  isolation,  each  individual  downside  factor  is  plausible, 
however in order to demonstrate the severity of circumstances 
that would result in the Group coming close to being unable 
to  comply  with  debt  covenants,  the  above  scenarios  have 
been  modelled  simultaneously  in  the  severe  but  plausible 
downside scenario.

The Directors note the uncertainties surrounding the timing 
and extent of non-recurring revenues from quarter to quarter, 
and  the  timing  and  extent  of  capital  expenditure,  with 
increased  utilisation  of  the  Group’s  asset  financing  facility 
modelled under both the base case budget and the severe 
but  plausible  downside  scenario.  As  a  result,  the  Directors 
continue to closely monitor quarterly liquidity together with 
debt  covenant  compliance  forecasts.  Under  the  severe  but 
plausible downside scenario outlined above, there is limited 
covenant headroom available throughout the going concern 
assessment  period.  As  a  result,  the  Directors  expect  that 
the  final  dividend  for  FY23,  which  is  to  be  considered  for 
approval  at  the  AGM  on  28  September  2023,  will  be  paid 
in  the  final  quarter  of  the  financial  year  FY24.  The  cashflow 
forecasts  prepared  and  as  described  above,  include  a  final 
FY23  dividend  payment  in  January  2024  and  the  Directors 
will continue to monitor quarterly liquidity and debt covenant 
compliance and the timing of subsequent dividend payments. 

While  the  Directors  consider  that  the  downside  scenario 
modelled  represents  a  severe  stress,  additional  mitigating 
actions  remain  available  that  have  not  been  modelled 
including the rephasing of non-essential capital expenditure, 
and the rephasing or reduction of certain non-essential costs. 

Under the severe but plausible downside scenario modelled, the 
forecasts  demonstrate  that  the  Group  is  expected  to  maintain 
sufficient  liquidity  and  will  continue  to  comply  with  its  debt 
covenants  throughout  the  going  concern  assessment  period, 
though  covenant  headroom  is  limited  throughout  and  the 

increased utilisation level of the Group’s asset financing facility is 
required to ensure continued compliance with debt covenants.

The  Directors  therefore  remain  confident  that  the  Group 
and  parent  Company  have  adequate  resources  to  continue 
to  meet  their  liabilities  as  and  when  they  fall  due  within  a 
period  of  at  least  12  months  from  the  date  of  approval  of 
these financial statements, and have therefore prepared the 
financial statements on a going concern basis.

1.2 Changes In accounting policy and disclosure

Adopted IFRS not yet applied

There  are  no  new  standards,  amendments  to  existing 
standards  or  interpretations  that  are  not  yet  effective  that 
are expected to have a material impact on the Group. Such 
developments  are  routinely  reviewed  by  the  Group  and  its 
financial reporting systems are adapted as appropriate.

1.3 Basis of consolidation

The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company 
and of its subsidiary undertakings drawn up to 31 March 2023.

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has control. 
The Group controls an entity when the Group is exposed to, 
or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the 
entity  and  has  the  ability  to  affect  those  returns  through  its 
power over the entity. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from 
the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They are 
deconsolidated from the date that control ceases. 

Intra-group  transactions,  balances  and  unrealised  gains 
and  losses  on  transactions  between  group  companies  are 
eliminated on consolidation.

1.4 Segmental reporting

IFRS 8 requires operating segments to be identified based on 
internal financial information reported to the chief operating 
decision-maker  for  decision-making  purposes.  The  Group 
considers that this role is performed by the main Board. The 
Board believes that the Group continues to comprise a single 
reporting segment, being the provision of managed services 
to customers.

1.5 Revenue recognition

IFRS  15  ‘Revenue  from  contracts  with  customers’  requires 
“performance obligations” to be identified at the inception 
of the contract for each of the distinct goods or services that 
have  been  promised  to  the  customer.  The  following  table 
summarises the performance obligations we have identified 
for  our  major  revenue  lines  and  provides  information  on 
the time of when they are satisfied and the related revenue 
recognition policy. The Group does not consider that there 
are  any  significant  judgements  made  in  concluding  when  a 
customer obtains control of a promised good or service. 

89

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.5 Revenue recognition (continued)

Revenue line

Performance obligation

Revenue recognition policy

Recurring Revenue

Provision of managed services to the customer. All of 
the revenue in this category is contracted and includes 
a full range of managed support, maintenance, license 
subscription, and service agreements. 

Performance obligations are identified for each distinct 
service for which the customer has contracted and are 
considered to be satisfied over the time period that 
these services are delivered.

Product Revenue

Provision of third-party hardware (e.g., phone handsets, 
routers) to the customer as a one-off, distinct sale.

Performance obligations are satisfied at the point in 
time that control passes to the customer.

Services Revenue 

Provision of professional services, consultancy, and 
engineering services in order to setup and install a 
customer managed service. 

Installation is typically intrinsically linked to the  
provision of the managed services (in recurring  
revenue above), so these services do not represent 
separate performance obligations and are therefore, 
combined with the associated service performance 
obligation. 

The Group also provides certain services that are 
non-complex and distinct from the provision of the 
underlying managed service contract (e.g., hardware 
sales). The completion of these services is a separate 
performance obligation.

Revenue for these types of services is 
recognised evenly over the period of the 
agreement as the services are provided.

Revenues for product sales are recognised 
in full in the income statement upon 
delivery to the customer. 

Amongst other factors the Group has 
pricing and fulfilment risk and as such 
is considered to be principal in these 
transactions.

Services revenue is recognised from the 
date of installation of a managed service 
and recognised evenly over the period of 
the agreement. 

For distinct separable services revenue 
is recognised at the point of completion 
of the performance obligation (e.g. upon 
delivery to the customer).

There are no material obligations in respect of returns, refunds or warranties.

The Group recognises revenue based on the stand-alone selling price of each performance obligation. Determining the selling 
price is typically driven by list prices. 

Payments received in advance of the revenue recognition point are recognised as deferred income within trade and other payables 
and amounts billed in arrears are accrued income within trade and other receivables. Revenue expected to be recognised in 
future periods for performance obligations that are not complete (or partially complete) as at 31 March 2023 is £219m.  Of this, 
£215m relates to revenue for recurring managed services. In comparison, revenue expected to be recognised in future periods 
for performance obligations that were not complete (or partially complete) as at 31 March 2022 was £117m. Of this, £108m 
related to revenue for recurring managed services. 30 days standard payment terms are offered to customers.

The Group pays commission to its sales teams for new contracts and renewals with the associated cost recognised over the life 
of the contract in accordance with IFRS15.  Commission payments paid in advance are recognised as a contract assets in trade 
and other receivables.

90

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.5 Revenue recognition (continued)

Incremental  revenues  are  generated  based  on  usage  for 
calls  and data.   Some  managed service contracts  contain an 
element of usage-based charges, and customers may request 
additional  services  or  changes  in  scope,  both  resulting  in 
additional charges.  Usage-based charges are typically billed 
in  arrears,  in  the  period  subsequent  to  which  the  usage 
takes  place,  and  revenue  is  therefore,  accrued  in  the  month 
which usage takes place.  For changes in scope or additional 
services, a new distinct contract is entered into, with revenue 
recognised as above. 

1.6 Exceptional items

Exceptional  items  are  items  of  income  and  expense  which 
are  material  and,  due  to  their  nature  or  size,  are  presented 
separately  on  the  face  of  the  income  statement  in  order 
to  provide  an  understanding  of  the  Group’s  financial 
performance.  Exceptional  items  are  excluded  from  the 
Group’s  alternative  performance  measures 
(APMs),  as 
defined  on  page  20,  and  are  disclosed  in  detail  in  note  9. 
Amounts  included  in  exceptional  items  may  also  represent 
true ups presented as exceptional in prior periods.

Where the terms of an equity-settled award are modified or 
a new award is designated as replacing a cancelled or settled 
award,  the  existing  charge  is  recognised  immediately.  In 
addition,  an  expense  is  recognised  over  the  remainder 
of  the  new  vesting  period  for  the  incremental  fair  value  of 
any  modification,  based  on  the  difference  between  the  fair 
value of the original award and the fair value of the modified 
award, both as measured on the date of the modification. No 
reduction is recognised if this difference is negative.

Where  an  equity-settled  award  is  cancelled,  it  is  treated  as 
if it had vested on the date of cancellation, and any expense 
not yet recognised for the award is recognised immediately. 
Any compensation paid up to the fair value of the award at 
the cancellation or settlement date is deducted from equity, 
with any excess over fair value being treated as an expense in 
the income statement.

The  costs  of  equity-settled  transactions  with  employees 
are settled by Redcentric Solutions Limited on behalf of the 
parent Company and added to the cost of the investment in 
the parent Company.

The  Group  does  not  operate  any  cash  settled  share-based 
payment schemes.

1.7 Share-based payments

1.8 Taxation

The  cost  of  equity-settled  transactions  with  employees 
is  measured  by  reference  to  the  fair  value  of  the  award  at 
the date at which they are granted and is recognised as an 
expense over the vesting period, which ends on the date at 
which  the  relevant  employees  become  fully  entitled  to  the 
award. Fair value is determined by an external valuer using 
an  appropriate  pricing  model  for  which  the  assumptions 
are  approved  by  the  Directors.  In  valuing  equity-settled 
transactions,  only  vesting  conditions  linked  to  the  market 
price of the shares of the Company are considered.

No expense is recognised for awards that do not ultimately 
vest, except for awards where vesting is conditional upon a 
market  condition,  which  are  treated  as  vesting  irrespective 
of whether or not the market condition is satisfied, provided 
that all other performance conditions are satisfied.

At  each  balance  sheet  date  before  vesting,  the  cumulative 
expense is calculated, representing the extent to which the 
vesting period has expired and management’s best estimate 
of  the  achievement  or  otherwise  of  non-market  conditions, 
number  of  equity  instruments  that  will  ultimately  vest  or  in 
the case of an instrument subject to a market condition, be 
treated  as  vesting  described  above.  The  movement  in  the 
cumulative expense since the previous balance sheet date is 
recognised  in  the  income  statement,  with  a  corresponding 
entry in equity.

The  taxation  expense  charged  in  the  Group  statement  of 
comprehensive income represents the sum of the current tax 
expense and the deferred tax expense.

The  current  tax  payable  is  based  on  the  taxable  profit  for 
the  year.  Taxable  profit  differs  from  accounting  profit  as 
reported in the Group statement of comprehensive income 
because  it  excludes  items  of  income  or  expense  that  are 
taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes 
items  that  are  never  taxable  or  deductible.  The  Group 
liability  for  current  tax  is  measured  using  tax  rates  that  
have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance 
sheet date.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable 
on  differences  between  the  carrying  amount  of  assets  and 
liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding 
tax  bases  used  in  the  computation  of  taxable  profit  and  is 
accounted  for  using  the  balance  sheet  liability  method. 
Deferred tax is provided for on all temporary differences at 
the balance sheet date between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities  and  their  carrying  amounts  for  financial  reporting 
purposes, with the following exceptions:

•  where  the  temporary  difference  arises  from  the  initial 
recognition  of  goodwill  or  an  asset  or  liability  in  a 
transaction that is not a business combination that at the

91

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.8 Taxation (continued)

time  of  the  transaction  affects  neither  accounting  nor 
taxable profit or loss; 

• 

• 

in respect of taxable temporary differences associated 
with investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the 
reversal of the temporary differences can be controlled 
and it is probable that the temporary differences will not 
reverse in the foreseeable future; and

deferred  income  tax  assets  are  recognised  only  to 
the  extent  that  it  is  probable  that  taxable  profits  will 
be  available  against  which  deductible  temporary 
differences carried forward tax credits or tax losses can 
be utilised.

1.9 Foreign currencies

The functional and presentation currency of Redcentric plc is 
Pound Sterling (£) and the Group conducts the majority of its 
business in Sterling.

Transactions  in  foreign  currencies  are  initially  recorded  in 
the  functional  currency  by  applying  the  rate  of  exchange 
ruling  at  the  date  of  the  transaction.  Monetary  assets  and 
liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated 
at  the  functional  currency  rate  of  exchange  ruling  at  the 
balance sheet date. All differences are taken to the income 
statement,  except  for  differences  on  monetary  assets  and 
liabilities  that  form  part  of  the  Group’s  net  investment  in  a 
foreign  operation.  These  are  taken  directly  to  equity  until 
the  disposal  of  the  net  investment,  at  which  time  they  are 
recognised in the profit or loss.

1.10 Pensions

The Group operates a defined contribution scheme. Pension 
costs  are  charged  directly  to  the  income  statement  in  the 
period to which they relate on an accrual’s basis. The Group 
has no further payment obligations once contributions have 
been paid.

1.11 Business combinations

Business  combinations  are  accounted  for  by  applying  the 
acquisition method at the accounting date, which is the date 
on  which  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  The  Group 
controls an entity when the Group is exposed to, or has rights 
to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and 
has the ability to affect those returns through its power over 
the entity.

The  consideration  transferred  for  the  acquisition  of  a 
subsidiary  is  the  fair  value  of  the  assets  transferred,  the 
liabilities  incurred,  and  the  equity  interests  issued  by  the 

Group.  The  consideration  transferred  includes  the  fair 
value  of  any  asset  or  liability  resulting  from  a  contingent 
consideration  arrangement.  Acquisition-related  costs  are 
expensed  as  incurred.  Identifiable  assets  acquired  and 
liabilities  and  contingent  liabilities  assumed  in  a  business 
combination  are  measured  initially  at  their  fair  value  at  the 
acquisition date. The Group recognises any non-controlling 
interest  in  the  acquiree  on  an  acquisition-by-acquisition 
basis, either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s 
proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

The excess of the consideration transferred and the amount 
of  any  non-controlling  interest  in  the  acquiree  over  the 
fair  value  of  the  separable  identifiable  net  assets  acquired 
and  liabilities  incurred  or  assumed  at  the  acquisition  date 
is  recorded  as  purchased  goodwill.  Provision  is  made  for 
any  impairment.  Accounting  policies  previously  applied  by 
acquired  subsidiaries  are  changed  as  necessary  to  comply 
with accounting policies adopted by the Group.

Where  an  acquisition  involves  a  potential  payment  of 
contingent  consideration  the  cost  is  estimated  based  on 
its  acquisition  date  fair  value  and  is  included  as  part  of 
the  consideration  transferred  in  a  business  combination.   
To  estimate  the  fair  value  an  assessment  is  made  as  to  the 
amount  of  additional  consideration  that  is  likely  to  be  paid 
with  reference  to  the  associated  criteria.  Where  a  change  
is made to the fair value of contingent consideration within 
the initial measurement period as a result of new or additional 
information that existed at the acquisition date the change is 
accounted for as a retrospective adjustment to goodwill.  Any 
change as a result of events that occurred after the acquisition 
date  then  the  adjustment  is  accounted  for  as  a  charge  or 
credit to profit or loss.  Measurement period adjustments are 
adjustments that arise from additional information obtained 
during the ‘measurement period’ (which cannot exceed one 
year from the acquisition date) about facts and circumstances 
that existed at the acquisition date.

Costs  related  to  acquisitions,  other  than  those  associated 
with  the  issue  of  debt  or  equity  securities,  are  expensed  
as incurred.

1.12 Subsidiaries

Subsidiaries  are  entities  controlled  by  the  Group.  The 
Financial  Statements  of  subsidiaries  are  included  in  the 
consolidated financial statements from the date that control 
is established to the date control ceases.

Control  is  achieved  where  the  acquiring  Company  has  the 
power  to  govern  the  financial  and  operating  policies  of  an 
investee entity therefore obtaining benefits from its activities. 
Intercompany  transactions  and  outstanding  balances  are 
eliminated on consolidation.

92

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.13 Intangible assets

a) Goodwill

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents 
the excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any 
non-controlling  interest  in  the  acquiree  and  the  acquisition-
date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree 
over  the  fair  value  of  the  identifiable  net  assets  acquired.  If 
the total of consideration transferred, non-controlling interest 
recognised and previously held interest measured at fair value 
is less than the fair value of the net asset of the subsidiary, in 
the case of a bargain purchase, the difference is recognised 
directly to the income statement. 

For  the  purposes  of  impairment  testing,  goodwill  acquired 
in  a  business  combination  is  allocated  to  each  of  the  cash-
generating units (CGUs), or groups of CGUs, that is expected 
to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Each unit or 
group of units to which the goodwill is allocated represents 
the  lowest  level  within  the  entity  at  which  the  goodwill  is 
monitored for internal management purposes.  

Goodwill 
impairment  reviews  are  undertaken  annually 
or  more  frequently  if  events  or  changes  in  circumstances 
indicate  a  potential  impairment.  The  carrying  value  of  the 
CGU containing the goodwill is compared to the recoverable 
amount,  which  is  the  higher  of  value  in  use  and  the  fair 
value  less  costs  of  disposal.  Any  impairment  is  recognised 
immediately as an expense and is not subsequently reversed.

Goodwill  is  reviewed  for  impairment  annually  or  more 
frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that 
the  carrying  value  may  be  impaired.  As  at  the  acquisition 
date  any  goodwill  acquired  is  allocated  to  each  of  the  cash 
generating  units  expected  to  benefit  from  the  business 
combination’s  synergies. 
is  determined  by 
assessing the recoverable amount of the cash generating unit 
to which the goodwill relates. When the recoverable amount 
of the cash generating unit is less than the carrying amount, 
including goodwill, an impairment loss is recognised.

Impairment 

Intangible assets with a finite life are amortised on a straight-
line basis over their expected useful lives, as follows:

Customer contracts and 
related relationships 

5 – 15 years  

Trademarks  

5 years

Software licences 

 5 years (or over the contract 
term if shorter)

ERP systems 

6 years

Impairment  and  amortisation  charges  are  included  within 
operating expenditure in the income statement.

c) Internally generated intangibles

Expenditure  on  software  development  is  capitalised  as  an 
intangible  asset  only  if  it  meets  the  recognition  criteria  set 
out in IAS 38 Intangible Assets, requiring it to be probable 
that the expenditure will generate future economic benefits 
and  can  be  measured  reliably.  To  meet  these  criteria,  it  is 
necessary  to  be  able  to  demonstrate,  among  other  things, 
the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so 
that it will be available for use or sale.

Development  expenditure  directed  towards  incremental 
improvements in existing products, remedial work and other 
maintenance  activity  does  not  qualify  for  recognition  as  an 
intangible asset.

1.14 Property, plant and equipment

Property,  plant  and  equipment  are  stated  at  cost  less 
accumulated  depreciation  and  any  impairment  in  value. 
The  cost  includes  the  original  price  of  the  asset  and  the 
cost attributable to bringing the asset to its current working 
condition for its intended use. 

Depreciation,  down  to  residual  value,  is  calculated  on  a 
straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset 
which is reviewed on an annual basis. 

b) Other intangible assets

Office Fixtures and fittings 

5 years

Other intangible assets are carried at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and impairment losses.

Other intangible assets acquired separately from a business 
are  carried  initially  at  cost.  An  intangible  asset  acquired 
as  part  of  a  business  combination  is  recognised  outside 
goodwill if the asset is separable or arises from contractual or 
other legal rights and its fair value can be measured reliably.

Leasehold improvements 

Vehicles and Computer  
Equipment 

 15 years (or over the lease 
term if shorter)

3 – 5 years (or over 
 the contract term if 
shorter)

93

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.14 Property, plant and equipment (continued)

1.16  Inventories and Cost of Sales

For  property,  plant  and  equipment  funded  through  leases, 
where  there  is  reasonable  certainty  that  the  Group  obtains 
ownership  by  the  end  of  the  lease  term,  depreciation  is 
provided on a straight-line basis over the useful life, otherwise 
it’s  provided  over  the  shorter  of  the  useful  life  and  the  
lease term.

An item of property, plant and equipment is de-recognised 
upon  disposal  or  when  no  future  economic  benefits  are 
expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. Any 
gain or loss arising on de-recognition of the asset (calculated 
as  the  difference  between  the  net  disposal  proceeds  and 
the  carrying  amount  of  the  item)  is  included  in  the  income 
statement in the period the item is de-recognised.

In  reviewing  the  value  of  property,  plant  and  equipment, 
consideration  for  any  impacts  of  climate  related  risks  to 
fair values or the useful economic lives of assets is deemed  
not material. 

1.15 Impairment of property, plant and equipment, 
right of use assets and intangible assets excluding 
goodwill

Other intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and 
right  of  use  assets  are  reviewed  for  impairment  whenever 
events  arise  or  changes  in  circumstances  indicate  the 
carrying values may not be recoverable. If any such indication 
exists and where the carrying amounts exceed the estimated 
recoverable amount, the assets or cash generating units are 
written down to their recoverable amount.

The recoverable amount of intangible assets, property, plant 
and equipment and right of use assets is the greater of fair 
value  less  costs  to  sell  and  value  in  use.  In  assessing  value 
in  use,  the  estimated  future  cash  flows  are  discounted  to 
their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects 
current market assessments of the time value of money and 
the  risks  specific  to  the  asset.  For  an  asset  that  does  not 
generate largely independent cash inflows, the recoverable 
amount is determined by the cash generating unit to which 
the  asset  belongs.  Fair  value  less  costs  to  sell  is,  where 
known,  based  on  actual  sales  price  net  of  costs  incurred  in 
completing the disposal.

Non-financial  assets  that  were  impaired  in  the  previous 
periods  are  annually  reviewed  to  assess  whether  the 
impairment is still relevant. 

94

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value.  Cost  corresponds  to  purchase  cost  determined 
by  the  first 
is  
made,  where  necessary,  for  slow-moving,  obsolete  and 
defective inventories.

(FIFO)  method.  Provision 

in  first  out 

1.17 Leases

IFRS 16 has introduced a single on-balance sheet accounting 
model  for  lessees.  When  entering  into  a  new  contract,  the 
Group  assesses  whether  it  is,  or  contains,  a  lease.  A  lease 
conveys a right to control the use of an identified asset for a 
period of time in exchange for consideration. 

The Group recognises a right of use asset and a lease liability 
at  the  lease  commencement  date.  The  right  of  use  asset  is 
initially measured at cost, and subsequently at cost less any 
accumulated  depreciation  and  impairment  losses,  adjusted 
for certain remeasurements of the lease liability. Depreciation 
is provided on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease, 
or the useful economic life if that is shorter.

Cost  of  the  right-of-use  asset  consists  of  the  initial  lease 
liability  plus  any  lease  payments  made  to  the  lessor  before 
the commencement date (less any lease incentives received), 
plus  the  initial  estimate  of  restoration  costs  and  any  initial 
direct costs incurred by the lessee. 

Obligations to restore the underlying asset to the condition 
required  by  the  terms  and  conditions  of  the  lease  are 
recognised and measured under IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent 
Liabilities  and  Contingent  Assets,  and  a  corresponding 
asset included in the related right-of-use asset. Dilapidation 
provisions  are  discounted  to  present  value  at  the  yearend 
and subsequent unwinding of the discounting is recorded in 
the income statement.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of 
the lease payments that are not paid at the commencement 
date  and  discounted  using  the  interest  rate  implicit  in  the 
lease or, more typically, the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate (when the implicit rate cannot be readily determined).

The  lease  liability  is  subsequently  increased  by  the  interest 
cost on the lease liability and decreased by lease payments 
made.  It  is  remeasured  when  there  is  a  change  in  future 
lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, or 
changes  in  the  Group’s  assessment  of  whether  a  purchase, 
extension  or  termination  option  is  reasonably  certain  to  
be exercised.

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.17 Leases (continued)

Cash and cash equivalents

The  Group  adopts  recognition  exemptions  for  short-term 
(less than 12 months) on property and low value on a lease 
by  lease  basis.  The  Group  classifies  payments  of  lease 
liabilities (principal and interest portions) as part of financing 
activities.  Payments  of  short-term,  low  value  and  variable 
lease components are classified within operating activities.

Cash  and  cash  equivalents  on  the  balance  sheet  comprise 
cash  at  bank  and  in  hand  and  short-term  deposits  with  an 
original maturity of three months or less.

b) Financial liabilities

Trade payables

1.18 Financial instruments

a) Financial assets

Trade payables are stated at their nominal value, recognised 
initially  at  fair  value  and  subsequently  valued  at  amortised 
cost.

The  Group  classifies  its  financial  assets  as  loans  and 
receivables measured at amortised cost.

Provisions

Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with 
fixed or determinable payments which are not quoted in an 
active market. They are included in current assets, except for 
maturities  greater  than  12  months  after  the  balance  sheet 
date which are classified as non-current assets. The Group’s 
loans and receivables comprise ‘trade and other receivables’, 
‘cash and cash equivalents’, and ‘other receivables’ which are 
expected to be settled in cash.

Trade receivables

Trade  receivables  are  amounts  due  from  customers  for 
goods sold and services provided in the ordinary course of 
business.  Trade  receivables  are  recognised  initially  at  fair 
value  and  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using 
the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

In  recognising  any  provision  for  impairment,  the  Group 
applies  the  IFRS  9  approach  to  measuring  expected  credit 
losses  which  uses  a  lifetime  expected  loss  allowance  for  all 
assets held at amortised cost. The Group recognises a loss 
allowance for all expected credit losses on initial recognition 
using  an  allowance  matrix  to  measure  the  expected  credit 
losses  of  trade  receivables  from  individual  and  corporate 
customers. Loss rates are calculated using a ‘roll rate’ method 
based on the probability of a receivable progressing through 
successive  stages  of  delinquency  to  write-off.      Given  the 
similar  characteristics  of  the  product  and  service  types, 
geographic  region  and  type  of  customer  relationship,  all 
customers  in  each  ageing  bracket  have  had  the  same  rate 
applied.

The  Group’s  trade  and  other  receivables  are  non-interest 
bearing.

Provisions  are  recognised  when  the  Group  has  a  present 
obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, 
it  is  probable  that  an  outflow  of  resources  embodying 
economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, 
and  a  reliable  estimate  can  be  made  of  the  amount  of  
the obligation.

If the effect of the time value of money is material, provisions 
are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows 
at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of 
the  time  value  of  money  and,  where  appropriate,  the  risks 
specific to the liability. 

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

All  loans  and  borrowings  are  initially  recognised  at  fair 
value less directly attributable transaction costs. After initial 
recognition,  interest-bearing  loans  and  borrowings  are 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method. Gains and losses arising on the repurchase, 
settlement  or  otherwise  cancellation  of 
liabilities  are 
recognised in the finance cost line in the income statement.

Loans  are  carried  at  fair  value  of  initial  recognition,  net  of 
unamortised issue costs of debt. These costs are amortised 
over the loan term.

1.19 Dividends

Dividends  payable  to  equity  shareholders  are  included  in 
the financial statements within ‘other creditors’ when a final 
dividend is approved by shareholders in a general meeting.  
Interim  dividends  to  equity  shareholders  approved  by 
the  board  during  the  financial  year  are  not  included  in  the 
financial statements until paid.

95

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.20 Research and Development costs

Expenditure  on  research  activities  is  recognised  in  the 
Income Statement as an expense as incurred. Expenditure on 
development activities is capitalised as “development costs” 
if  the  product  or  process  is  technically  and  commercially 
feasible, if the Group has the technical ability and sufficient 
resources  to  complete  development,  if  future  economic 
benefits are probable and if the Group can measure reliably 
the  expenditure  attributable  to  the  intangible  asset  during 
its  development.  Development  activities  involve  a  plan  or 
design for the production of new or substantially improved 
products or processes.

1.21 Allocation of costs

Cost of sales are those costs which are directly attributable 
to the business in order to generate revenue, which includes 
costs  of  hardware  and  software  sold  to  customers,  freight 
and delivery, reseller commissions and set-up costs. 

Operating  costs  are  all  other  expenses  relating  to  the 
underlying  business,  which  includes  staff  costs,  legal  and 
professional fees, office costs, marketing and advertising.

2  Critical  accounting  judgements,  key  sources 
of  estimation  uncertainty  and  other  areas  of 
estimation

In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, which 
are  described  in  note  1,  the  Board  are  required  to  make 
judgements, estimates and assumptions about the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities, without clear direction from 
other  sources.    The  estimates  and  associated  assumptions 
are based on historical experience and other factors that are 
considered  to  be  relevant.    Actual  results  may  differ  from 
these estimates. 

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on 
an  ongoing  basis.    Revisions  to  accounting  estimates  are 
recognised  in  the  period  in  which  the  estimate  is  revised  if 
the revision only affects that period, or in the period of the 
revision and future periods if the revision affects both current 
and future periods. 

Judgements

The  Group  have  identified  the  following  item  as  a  critical 
accounting judgement which would have a significant impact 
to the amounts recognised in the financial statements for the 
year ended 31 March 2023. 

2.1  Accounting  for  multiple  arrangements  as  a 
single transaction

During  the  year,  the  Group’s  trading  subsidiary  Redcentric 
Solutions  Limited  acquired  the  consulting  business  and 
certain  business  and  assets  relating  to  three  data  centres 
(“DCs”)  from  Sungard  Availability  Services  (UK)  Limited  (in 
administration).  The  acquisition  of  the  consulting  business 
was legally completed on 7 June 2022 and the DCs on 6 July 
2022.  These are legally separate transactions with their own 
purchase  agreements  however,  the  Group  have  considered 
if  they  form  a  single  transaction  to  achieve  an  overall 
commercial effect. 

The  transactions  happened  within  a  short  time  frame 
and  were  entered  into  in  contemplation  of  each  other.  
The  commercial  rationale  for  the  consulting  transaction 
was  inherently  linked  to  facilitating  the  subsequent  DCs 
transaction  and  the  acquisition  of  the  consulting  business 
was not economically justified on its own but is economically 
justified when considered together with the DCs transaction.

In  review  of  the  above,  the  Group  have  determined  that 
these  two  arrangements  should  be  accounted  for  as  a 
single  transaction.    Please  refer  to  note  32  for  business 
combinations.

Estimates

2.2  Fair  value  of  consideration  transferred, 
including contingent consideration 

The fair value measurement of the consideration transferred 
for  business  combinations  in  the  year,  which  includes 
elements  of  contingent  consideration,  involves  estimation 
uncertainty  regarding  the  amount  to  be  recognised  in  the 
financial statements due to the uncertain future events which 
management  are  required  to  assess  at  the  acquisition  date 
and at subsequent reporting dates in order to determine the 
fair  value  at  those  points.  In  assessing  these  future  events, 
management  consider  the  probability  and  likelihood  of 
specific  events  and  results  occurring,  which  impact  the  fair 
value of the contingent consideration. 

Management  have  considered  the  fair  value  assessment  at 
the  acquisition  date  and  at  the  reporting  date.  The  range 
of  possible  outcomes  of  contingent  consideration  when  the 
payment  crystallises  on  the  12-month  anniversary  of  the 
acquisition are between £0.0m and £2.8m as at the year end. 
The  amounts  of  consideration  for  the  year  ended  31  March 
2023 are included in note 32, and contingent consideration at  
note 23.

96

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

2.3  Fair  values  of  acquired  intangible  assets 
and  property,  plant  and  equipment  on  business 
combinations 

IFRS  3  ‘Business  combinations’  requires  assets  and  liabilities 
acquired from business combinations to be measured initially 
at  fair  value  and  then  subsequently  revalued  to  fair  value  at 
each period end.  In establishing the fair values of assets and 
liabilities  acquired  in  business  combinations,  estimation  is 
used  in  a  number  of  areas.    To  assist  in  this  work,  the  Group 
has engaged external valuation experts to assess the fair value. 
Management  have  then  reviewed  the  work  and  assessed  the 
results in forming their view on the fair value estimation included 
in the business combinations for the year ended 31 March 2023. 

The  fair  values  have  been  established  in  accordance  with 
IFRS  13.  Establishing  the  fair  values  of  each  asset  type  has 
been outlined below:

Customer relationship intangibles

The  fair  values  of  the  customer  relationship  intangible 
involves  estimation  uncertainty  at  the  acquisition  date  as 
they are sensitive to the forecast future cashflows generated 
from  these  assets  and  the  discount  rate  in  establishing  the 
present value. The inputs into the forecast also include EBIT 
margin and customer attrition rates, which affect the future 
cashflows generated.

Sungard Data Centres: 

If short-term customer revenue attrition rates were to increase 
by 10%, the estimated fair value would decrease by £0.2m.

If the discount rate used in arriving at the estimated fair value 
of  customer  relationship  intangibles  increased  by  2%,  this 
would result in a reduction in the acquisition date fair value 
of these assets of £0.6m.   

If the EBIT margin applied to the derive the forecast future 
cashflows  before  discounting  were  to  increase  by  10%,  this 
would result in an increase to the acquisition date fair value 
of these assets by £1.3m. 

4D Data Centres: 

If  the  customer  revenue  attrition  rates  were  to  increase  by 
3%, the estimated fair value would decrease by £0.7m.

If the discount rate used in arriving at the estimated fair value 
of  customer  relationship  intangibles  increased  by  2%,  this 
would result in a reduction in the acquisition date fair value 
of these assets of £0.5m.   

If the EBIT margin applied to the derive the forecast future 
cashflows  before  discounting  were  to  increase  by  10%,  this 
would result in an increase to the acquisition date fair value 
of these assets by £0.7m. 

97

Property, plant and equipment

The Group engaged an external valuation expert to assess the 
fair  value  of  certain  items  of  property,  plant  and  equipment 
acquired  through  business  combinations,  relating  to  the 
largest data centre of the Sungard transaction. 

The fair values of the property, plant and equipment involves 
estimation uncertainty due to the useful economic life applied to 
each category of asset.  If the useful economic life was increased 
by one year, the depreciation charge in the current year would 
decrease by £0.6m. There is also estimation uncertainty related 
to the replacement cost and utilisation levels of the assets under 
the depreciated replacement cost method.

The estimate of fair values of the identifiable assets acquired 
and  the  liabilities  assumed  as  part  of  these  transactions 
involved  estimation  uncertainty  in  finalising  the  purchase 
price  allocation.    As  the  amounts  have  now  been  finalised, 
the  Directors  do  not  consider  this  to  be  a  major  source  of 
estimation uncertainty at the yearend, as it is not considered 
there will be a material reversal in future periods. 

3 Financial risk management

The objectives of the Group’s treasury activities are to manage 
financial risk, secure cost-effective funding where necessary and 
minimise adverse effects of fluctuations in the financial markets 
on the value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, on 
reported profitability and on cash flows of the Group.

The  Group’s  principal  financial  instruments  for  fundraising 
are  bank  borrowings,  overdraft  facilities  and  loans.  The 
Group  has  various  other  financial  instruments  such  as  cash, 
trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from 
its operations.

The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: 
market  risk  (including  foreign  exchange,  cash  flow  interest 
rate  risk,  and  price  risk),  credit  risk,  and  liquidity  risk.  The 
Group’s  overall  risk  management  programme 
focuses 
on  the  unpredictability  of  financial  markets  and  seeks  to 
minimise  potential  adverse  effects  on  the  Group’s  financial 
performance. Risk management is carried out centrally under 
policies  approved  by  the  Board  of  Directors.  The  Board 
provides  principles  for  overall  risk  management,  as  well  as 
policies covering each specific risk area.

a) Foreign exchange risk

The  Group  mainly  operates  within  the  UK  with  foreign 
transactions  with 
exchange 
counterparties denominated in foreign currencies. This is not 
a significant risk for the Group. 

from  certain 

risk  arising 

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

3 Financial risk management (continued)

b) Cash flow interest rate risk

The  Group  receives  interest  on  cash  and  cash  equivalents 
and  pays  interest  on  its  borrowings.  Borrowings  at  variable 
rates  expose  the  Group  to  cash  flow  interest  rate  risk. 
During  the  year  the  Group’s  borrowings  at  variable  rate 
were denominated in Pounds Sterling with interest linked to 
Sterling interest rates.

its 

The  Group  analyses 
interest  rate  exposure  on  a 
dynamic  basis.  Various  scenarios  are  simulated  taking  into 
consideration  refinancing,  renewal  of  existing  positions, 
alternative financing and hedging. Based on these scenarios, 
the Group calculates the impact on profit or loss of a defined 
interest rate shift and manages its cash flow interest rate risk 
accordingly. 

Based on the simulations performed, the impact on post-tax 
profit and equity of a +/– 1% shift in the interest rate would 
not be material. The simulation is done on a quarterly basis 
to  verify  that  the  maximum  loss  potential  is  within  the  limit 
given by management.

c) Price risk

The Group is not exposed to significant commodity or security 
price  risk.  The  Group  has  entered  into  contracts  with  energy 
brokers  and  has  agreed  own-use  commodity  prices  for  a 
significant proportion of its expected electricity volumes, which 
significantly reduces its exposure to price volatility.

d) Credit risk

Credit  risk  arises  from  cash  and  cash  equivalents,  as  well 
as  credit  exposures  to  customers.  Individual  risk  limits  are 
set based on internal and external ratings and reviewed by 
the Board where appropriate. The utilisation of credit limits 
is  regularly  monitored  with  appropriate  action  taken  by 
management in the event of a breach of credit limit.

Liquidity risk

Management monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s undrawn 
borrowing  facility  and  cash  and  cash  equivalents  based  on 
expected cash flow. The Group’s liquidity management policy 
involves  projecting  cash  flows  and  considering  the  level  of 
liquid assets necessary to meet these.

4 Capital risk management

The  Group’s  objectives  when  managing  capital  are  to 
safeguard  the  Group’s  future  growth  and  its  ability  to 
continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for 
shareholders  and  to  maintain  an  optimal  capital  structure 

to  reduce  the  cost  of  capital.  The  Group  operates  in  the 
managed services sector which, generally, does not require 
substantial fixed asset investments.   

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure the Group has 
previously both issued new shares and borrowed using bank 
facilities.  The Group monitors capital on the basis of the ratio 
of net bank debt to adjusted EBITDA. Net debt is calculated 
as  total  bank  borrowings  (including  ‘current  and  non-current 
borrowings’ as shown in the consolidated balance sheet) less 
cash  and  cash  equivalents,  and  adjusted  EBITDA  is  defined 
as  earnings  before  interest,  tax,  depreciation,  amortisation, 
exceptional  costs  and  share-based  payments.  The  Group’s 
strategy  is  to  maintain  the  ongoing  ratio  at  below  2.5x.  The 
ratio was below this level throughout the year, and at 31 March 
2023 was 1.8x (31 March 2022 – 0.0x). 

The  bank  facilities  referred  to  in  note  24  contain  various 
covenants  relating  to  EBITDA,  interest  cover,  net  debt  and 
cash  flow,  which  the  Group  monitors  on  a  monthly  basis. 
The  Group  adopts  a  risk-averse  position  with  respect  to 
borrowings and maintains headroom in its bank facilities to 
ensure that any unexpected situations do not create financial 
stress. Refer to note 1.1.

A  final  dividend  payment  of  2.4p  per  share  is  expected 
to    be  paid  on  19  January  2024,  subject  to  approval  at  the 
Company’s  AGM,  to  shareholders  on  the  register  at  the 
close  of  business  on  8  December  2023  with  shares  going 
ex-dividend on 7 December 2023. The last day for Dividend 
Reinvestment Plan elections is 27 December 2023. 

The  Group  grants  share  options  to  Directors  and  other 
selected employees. However, these do not have a significant 
impact on the Group’s capital structure.

5 Segment reporting

IFRS 8 requires operating segments to be identified based on 
internal financial information reported to the chief operating 
decision-maker (CODM) for decision-making purposes. The 
Group  considers  that  this  role  is  performed  by  the  main 
Board.    The  Board  believes  that  the  Group  continues  to 
comprise  a  single  reporting  segment,  being  the  provision 
of  managed  services  to  customers.  The  CODM  assesses 
profit  performance  principally  through  an  adjusted  EBITDA 
measure, as defined on page 15.

Whilst  the  Board  reviews  the  Group’s  three  revenue  streams 
separately (recurring, product and service), the operating costs 
and operating asset base used to derive these revenue streams 
are the same for all three categories and are presented as such 
in the Group’s internal reporting to the CODM.

Non-current  assets  held  outside  the  UK  are  immaterial  (31 
March 2022: immaterial).

98

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

6 Revenue

Revenue for the year ended 31 March 2023 was generated wholly from the UK and is analysed as follows: 

Recurring revenue

Product revenue

Services revenue

Total revenue

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

128,461

7,144

6,069

141,674

82,965

6,187

4,176

93,328

Revenue is analysed into the following categories:

• 

Recurring revenue, which was higher at £128.5m (FY22: £83.0m). 

•  Non-recurring product revenue, which was higher at £7.1m (FY22: £6.2m).

•  Non-recurring services revenue which was higher at £6.1m (FY22: £4.2m).

The year on year increases noted are in part attributable to the impact of acquisitions in the period. See note 32.

6.1 Contract Balances

The  following  table  provides  information  about  receivables,  contract  assets  and  contract  liabilities  from  contracts  with 
customers. 

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

Receivables, included in trade and other receivables, net of provisions

Accrued income, included in trade and other receivables

Deferred income, included in trade and other payables

20,205

4,568

(8,331)

10,228

2,626

(7,530) 

There were no material impairment losses recorded during the year or the prior year. 

£6.7m of deferred revenue at 31 March 2022 was recognised as revenue in FY23.

99

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

7 Operating profit

The following costs are considered to be significant items within operating profit. 

Amortisation of acquired intangible assets

Amortisation of intangible assets: owned

Depreciation: owned assets

Depreciation and Amortisation of ROU assets: Leased

Share-based payments

Net foreign exchange losses

Expense in relation to short-term and low value leases not recognised under IFRS 16

Employee benefits expense, excluding share-based compensation 

Exceptional items (note 9)

Other operating income is broken down as follows:

Income from Transition Service Agreement 

Other income

8 Auditor’s remuneration

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

8,183

590

4,636

10,617

1,256

11

-

33,223

8,149

66,665

6,498

475

2,745

4,578

1,181

74

27

21,670

1,629

38,877

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

88

-

88

100

3

103

Total fees payable by the Group during the year to KPMG LLP in respect of the audit and other services provided were as 
follows:

Audit of these financial statements

Audit of Subsidiaries (including overseas subsidiaries)

Additional audit fees in relation to business combinations audit work 

Total audit

Tax compliance services

Tax advisory services

Services relating to taxation

Other non-audit services not covered above

Total non-audit services

Total fees

100

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

45

364

100

509

-

-

-

1

1

30

288

-

318

3

1

4

-

4

510

322

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

9 Exceptional items

Included within operating expenditure:

Employee restructuring

Release of Insurance adviser provision including professional fees

Lease modification

Business sale process

Acquisition related professional and legal fees 

Integration costs 

Historic share warrant exercise

Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute

Impairment of intangible assets

Cloud computing costs

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

-

-

-

-

695

5,965

-

809

-

680

8,149

159

(483)

(119)

70

971

-

310

119

205

397

1,629 

Acquisition and integration costs were incurred in relation to the purchase of certain business and assets relating to three data 
centres from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (“Sungard)”, the consulting business from Sungard and 100% of the issued 
share capital of 4D Data Centres Limited during the year (note 32).  The acquisition fees relate to legal and advisor fees and due 
diligence costs. The integration costs are those incurred in integrating the three businesses into the Group and include costs 
relating  to  the  TSA  (Transition  Service  Agreement)  (£1.4m),  migrating  customers  (£1.2m)  and  employee  restructuring  (£3.3m). 
There was also £0.1m of audit fees relating to the work completed on the acquisitions. Cash costs were £6.7m.

Costs relating to the settlement of an historical supplier dispute were for crystallisation of the settlement amount of £0.6m and 
amounts charged by the Group’s legal advisors in this matter. Cash costs were £0.8m. 

Cloud  computing  costs  relate  to  expenditure  to  achieve  the  original  implementation  scope  of  the  Group’s  major  ERP 
implementation programme, and the continued remediation of the Group’s ERP system (Microsoft Dynamics 365) to resolve a 
number of implementation related process & system deficiencies that required correcting post initial implementation. FY23 is 
the final year that these costs will be incurred as exceptional. Future costs associated with the D365 system are developmental 
and will improve or enhance capability from the original scope of the project now that the original implementation scope has 
been substantially achieved. This was a cash cost in both years.

10 Finance costs

Finance costs

Interest payable on bank loans and overdrafts

Interest payable on leases 

Amortisation of loan arrangement fees

Other interest payable

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(1,827)

(1,218)

(291)

(194)

(3,530)

(81)

(990)

-

-

(1,071) 

Interest payable on leases includes £1.2m (FY22: £0.8m) of interest on leases previously classified as operating leases  
under IAS17.

Other interest payable relates to interest on contingent consideration and dilapidation provisions. 

101

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

11 Employees

The average monthly number of people (including Executive Directors) employed by the Group during the year was as follows: 

Operations

Selling and distribution

Administration

Employee costs were:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Share options granted to Directors and employees

Pension costs

Payments in lieu of notice and redundancy not included within exceptional items

Payments in lieu of notice and redundancy included within exceptional items

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
Number

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
Number

429

83

76

588

346

79

61

486

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

27,978

3,251

1,257

1,263

277

453

34,479

18,682

1,969

1,181

848

12

159

22,851

The payments in lieu of notice and redundancy included within exceptional items are within the integration related costs.  

11.1 Key management compensation

Key  management  personnel  are  those  persons  having  authority  and  responsibility  for  planning,  controlling  and  directing 
the  activities  of  the  entity  either  directly,  or  indirectly.  The  following  table  details  the  compensation  of  key  management 
personnel, being senior management that sit on the Operating Board of the Group along with exec and non-exec directors.

Basic salary, allowances, fees and other employment expenses

Bonus and other benefits

Share based payments

Pension costs

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

1,667

123

601

91

2,482

1,878

306

593

63

2,840

102

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

11 Employees (continued)

11.2 Director’s remuneration

The remuneration of the Directors in respect of the year was as follows:

Basic Salary, 
allowances, 
and feesl

Bonus

Pension

Share-
based 
payments 

£000

£000

£000

£000

FY23 
Total

£000

FY22 
Total

£000

Executive 

Peter Brotherton1

David Senior2 

Non-executive

Ian Johnson (resigned 17 November 2021)

Stephen Vaughan (resigned 28 April 2021)

Alan Aubrey (appointed 21 July 2022)

Jon Kempster (resigned 21 July 2022)

Nick Bate 

Helena Feltham 

368

200

-

-

38

25

85

50

54

24

-

-

-

-

-

-

16

11

3931

1042

831

339

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

38

25

85

50

863

293

54

11

-

49

31

37

1 On  14  September  2022,  Peter  Brotherton  exercised  options  over  379,267  ordinary  shares  of  0.1p  each  at  a  price  of  103.5  pence  per  Ordinary  Share 
resulting in a pre-tax gain of £392,541.

2 On 14 September 2022, David Senior exercised options over 100,000 ordinary shares of 0.1p each at a price of 103.5 pence per Ordinary Share resulting 

in a pre-tax gain of £103,500.

103

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

11 Employees (continued)

11.3 Director’s remuneration

Details of share options in the Company held by the Directors during the year are as follows (audited):

Exercise 
price (p)

Balance,  
31 March 2022

Granted

Exercised

Balance,  
31 March 2023

Peter Brotherton 

David Senior

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(e)

0.1

0.1

0.1

99.9

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

(f)              

96.1

379,267

242,915

554,326

18,023

-

1,194,531

100,000

129,555

312,296

-

-

-

-

-

621,250

621,250

-

-

-

333,334

18,736

(379,267)

-

-

-

-

-

242,915

554,326

18,023

621,250

(379,267)

1,436,514

(100,000)

-

-

-

-

129,555

312,296

333,334

18,736

793,921

541,851

352,070

(100,000)

(a) The options were granted on 28 June 2019 under the Company’s LTIP. The options vested post the release of the Group’s 
results for the year ended 31 March 2022 following the achievement of performance conditions related to the growth in share 
price and were exercised by the CEO and CFO on 14 September 2022.

(b) The options were granted on 8 December 2020 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest post the release of the 
Group’s results for the year ended 31 March 2023 subject to the achievement of performance conditions related to the growth 
in share price.

(c) The options were granted on 18 November 2021 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant 
subject to absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. 
increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a.  For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 
10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.

(d) The options were granted on 23 December 2021 under the SAYE option plan under which employees contribute a monthly 
amount  which  is  saved  over  three  years  to  buy  shares.  The  options  are  exercisable  from  1  February  2025.  There  are  no 
performance conditions.

(e) The options were granted on 12 October 2022 under the Company’s LTIP. The options will vest three years from grant 
subject to absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Targets. For awards up to 100% of salary, 25% will vest for TSR of 5% p.a. 
increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 10% p.a. For awards between 100% and 200% of salary, 0% will vest for TSR of 
10% p.a. increasing pro-rata to 100% vesting for TSR of 15% p.a.

(f) The options were granted on 26th August 2022 under the SAYE option plan under which employees contribute a monthly 
amount which is saved over 3 years to buy shares. The options are exercisable from 01 October 2025. There are no performance 
conditions.

104

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

12 Income tax expense

Income tax

UK current year tax charge

Overseas current year tax charge

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Total income tax

Deferred tax

Current year

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Effect of changes in tax rates

Total deferred tax

Total tax credit in consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Other Comprehensive Income items

Deferred Tax

Factors affecting the tax charge for the year

 (Loss)/profit before taxation

Taxation at the average UK corporation tax rate of 19.0% (FY22: 19.0%)

Tax effects of:

-Expenses not allowable in determining taxable profit

-Adjustment in respect of prior years

-Non-taxable income

-Share options

-Fixed assets transferred in

-Reversal of uncertain tax position

-Prior year adjustment on provision

-Tax rate changes

-Super deduction adjustment

-Other tax effects

-Effect of overseas tax rates

Tax credit for the year

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

108

-

(7)

101

(2,437)

(31)

(852)

(3,320)

(3,219)

1,739

32

(1,371)

400

(1,214)

196

(786)

(1,804)

(1,404)

47

58

(12,469)

(2,369)

430

(38)

(239)

(172)

-

-

-

(503)

(292)

(90)

54

5,536

1,052

308

(1,175)

(381)

(32)

(58)

(323)

(21)

(786)

-

-

12

(3,219)

(1,404)

A  reduction  in  the  UK  corporation  tax  rate  from  19%  to  17%  (effective  1  April  2020)  was  substantively  enacted  on  
6  September  2016.  The  March  2020  Budget  announced  that  a  rate  of  19%  would  continue  to  apply  with  effect  from  
1  April  2020,  and  this  change  was  substantively  enacted  on  17  March  2020.  An  increase  in  the  UK  corporation  rate  from  
19%  to  25%  (effective  1  April  2023)  was  substantively  enacted  on  24  May  2021.  The  deferred  tax  asset  at  31  March  2023  
has been calculated based on these rates, reflecting the expected timing of reversal of the related temporary/timing differences 
(2022: 17%).

105

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statements 
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

13 Earnings per share (EPS)

The calculation of basic and diluted EPS is based on the following earnings and number of shares.

Earnings

Statutory (loss)/earnings

Tax credit

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Share-based payments

Exceptional items

Adjusted earnings before tax

Notional tax charge

Adjusted earnings

Weighted average number of ordinary shares

In issue

Held in treasury

For basic EPS calculations

Effect of potentially dilutive share options 

For diluted EPS calculations

EPS

Basic

Adjusted

Basic diluted

Adjusted diluted

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

(9,250)

(3,219)

8,183

1,256

8,149

5,119

(973)

4,146

Number 
‘000

156,992

(1,391)

155,601

3,678

159,279

Pence

(5.94p)

2.66p

(5.94p)

2.60p

6,940

(1,404)

6,498

1,181

1,629

14,844

(2,820)

12,024

Number 
‘000 

156,992

(420)

156,572

2,803

159,375

Pence 

4.43p

7.68p

4.36p

7.54p

In line with the Group’s policy, the notional tax charge above is calculated at a standard rate of 19% (FY22: 19%).

106

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

14 Dividends

Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2021

Interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2022

Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2022

Interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2023

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

-

-

3,719

1,874

5,593

3,749

1,878

-

-

5,627

The Group paid an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2022 of 1.2p per ordinary share, with a total payment value 
of £1.9m.

The Group paid a final dividend in respect of the year to 31 March 2022 of 2.4p per ordinary share, with a total payment value 
of £3.7m

The Group paid an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2023 of 1.2p per ordinary share, with a total payment value  
of £1.9m.

A final dividend payment of 2.4p per share is expected to be paid on 19 January 2024, subject to approval at the Company’s 
AGM, to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 8 December 2023 with shares going ex-dividend on 7 December 
2023. The last day for Dividend Reinvestment Plan elections is 27 December 2023.

107

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

15 Intangible Assets

Customer 
contracts 
and related 
relationships

Trademarks 
and brands 

Software 
and licences

£000

£000

£000

Goodwill

£000

Total

£000

42,084

62,284

-

10,332

- 

-

52,416

-

8,224

-

-

-

2,746

-

-

65,030

-

15,100

-

-

275

-

174

-

-

449

-

200

-

-

6,585

111,228

502

31

502

13,283

(1,548) 

(1,548) 

-

-

5,570

123,465

869

-

(135)

(1)

869

23,524

(135)

(1)

60,640

80,130

649

6,303

147,722

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

44,569

6,324

-

50,893

7,983

-

58,876

60,640

52,416

21,254

14,137

275

174

-

449

200

-

649

-

-

5,104

475

(1,182) 

4,397

590

(7)

49,948

6,973

(1,182) 

55,739

8,773

(7)

4,980

64,505

1,323

1,173

83,217

67,726

Cost

At 1 April 2021

Additions 

Additions on acquisition (note 32)

Disposals

Exchange difference

At 31 March 2022

Additions

Additions on acquisition (note 32)

Disposals

Exchange difference

At 31 March 2023

Accumulated amortisation and impairment

At 1 April 2021

Charged in year 

Disposals

At 31 March 2022

Charged in year

Disposals

At 31 March 2023

Net book value

At 31 March 2023

At 31 March 2022

Customer  contracts  have  a  weighted  average  remaining  amortisation  period  of  6  years  and  5  months  (FY22:  4  years  and  
4 months).

Software and licences include £0.6m (FY22 - £0.1m) of additions in relation to customer capital expenditure.

108

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

15 Intangible Assets (continued)

Goodwill is allocated to the Group’s cash-generating units (“CGUs”) that are expected to benefit from that combination based 
on relative carrying values of other acquired intangible assets. The carrying amount of Goodwill is allocated to those CGUs 
as follows:

IT Managed Service

Security Services

Year ended 
31 March 2023 
£000

Year ended 
31 March 2022 
£000

58,801

1,839

60,640

50,765

1,651

52,416

Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and, to confirm whether an impairment of the goodwill is necessary, management 
compares  the  carrying  value  to  the  value  in  use.    Other  intangible  assets  are  tested  for  impairment  whenever  events  or  a 
change  in  circumstances  indicate  carrying  values  may  no  longer  be  recoverable.  Consideration  for  any  impacts  of  climate 
related risks to impairment is not deemed to affect the overall conclusions in the medium to long term.

The value in use has been calculated using budgeted cash flow projections to the period of 31 March 2025, extrapolated for 
a further three years by an average annual revenue growth rate of 3.5% (FY22: 2.0%). A terminal value based on a perpetuity 
calculation using a 2.0% real growth rate was then added (FY22: 0.0% growth).

In addition to revenue growth, the key assumptions used in the impairment testing were as follows:

• 

 Gross margin percentage increasing to 66% (FY22: 63%)

•  Operating costs increasing by 3.0% (FY22: 1.5%), which is lower than inflation as some costs have been fixed to FY25

• 

Pre-tax discount rate of 11.2% (FY22: 11.8%) (post tax rate of 10.84% (FY22: 7.2%)) estimated using a weighted average 
cost of capital, adjusted to reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the 
Group; and

• 

Terminal growth rate percentage is consistent with the market the entity operates in for real growth.

A reasonably possible adverse movement in any of the above key assumptions made would not give rise to impairment.

109

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

16 Property, plant and equipment 

Leasehold 
improvements 

Office 
fixtures and 
fittings

Vehicles and 
computer 
equipment 

Assets under 
construction 

£000

£000

£000

£000

7,803

1,363

527

11

-

-

8,341

700

3,330

-

-

107

27

(331)

16

1,182

1,787

6,725

-

4

21,659

1,630

-

(25)

-

23,264

2,838

1,665

(909)

4

-

-

-

-

-

-

180

-

-

-

Total

£000

30,825

2,264

38

(356)

16

32,787

5,505

11,720

(909)

8

12,371

9,698

26,862

180

49,111

4,916

533

-

-

5,449

1,107

-

-

793

141

(316)

4

622

1,450

-

-

19,282

2,071

(9)

-

21,344

2,079

(71)

-

6,556

2,072

23,352

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

24,991

2,745

(325)

4

27,415

4,636

(71)

-

31,980

5,815

2,892

7,626

560

3,510

1,920

180

-

17,131

5,372

Cost

At 1 April 2021

Additions 

Additions on acquisition (note 32)

Disposals

Exchange differences

At 31 March 2022

Additions

Additions on acquisition (note 32)

Disposals

Exchange differences

At 31 March 2023

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 April 2021

Charged in year 

On disposals

Exchange differences

At 31 March 2022

Charged in year

On disposals

Exchange differences

At 31 March 2023

Net book value

At 31 March 2023

At 31 March 2022

Vehicles and computer equipment includes additions of £2.6m (FY22: £1.0m) relating to customer capital expenditure.

110

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

17 Right of use assets

Most of the Group’s right-of-use assets are associated with our leased property portfolio.

Cost

At 1 April 2021

Additions 

Remeasurement

At 31 March 2022

Additions

Additions on acquisition (note 32)

Disposals

Exchange differences

At 31 March 2023

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 April 2021

Charged in year 

Disposals

At 31 March 2022

Charged in year

Disposals

At 31 March 2023

Net book value

At 31 March 2023

At 31 March 2022

Land and  
buildings  

£000

Vehicles & 
computer 
equipment 

£000

25,506

2,947

(1,479)

26,974

36,189

3,911

(629)

(1)

66,444

12,261

2,252

(893)

13,620

8,676

-

22,296

44,148

13,354

11,707

460

(231)

11,936

391

-

-

-

12,327

6,165

2,326

(239)

8,252

1,941

-

10,193

2,134

3,684

Total

£000

37,213

3,407

(1,710)

38,910

36,580

3,911

(629)

(1)

78,771

18,426

4,578

(1,132)

21,872

10,617

-

32,489

46,282

17,038

Of the £40.5m right of use assets acquired in the year, £nil was funded using leases that would have previously been classified 
as finance leases under IAS17 (FY22: £0.4m).

Included in the net book value of land and buildings at 31 March 2023 is £9.8m right of use assets for dilapidations.

111

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

18 Deferred tax

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset on the face of the consolidated statement of financial position. 
The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances (before offset) for financial reporting purposes:

Deferred tax liabilities

Deferred tax assets

18.1 Deferred tax liabilities

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

(3,330)

4,406

1,076

(3,114)

7,113

3,999

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

Opening balance

Recognised in the income statement

Movements arising on acquisitions (note 32)

Adjustment in relation to prior year

Deferred tax liabilities relate to intangible assets from business acquisitions. 

18.2 Deferred tax assets

3,114

(1,409)

1,625

-

3,330

Share-
based 
payments

£000

India 

£000

Tax  
losses  

£000

Property, 
plant and 
equipment 

Other  
timing 
differences 

£000

£000

Cost

At 1 April 2021

Deferred tax acquired

Recognised in income statement

Recognised in other comprehensive income

Adjustment in relation to prior year

At 31 March 2022

Deferred tax acquired (note 32)

Recognised in income statement

Recognised in other comprehensive income

Adjustment in relation to prior year

At 31 March 2023

47

-

-

-

-

47

-

-

-

-

47

397

-

92

58

(26)

521

-

120

47

-

688

112

623

1,331

461

-

(435)

1,980

-

1,742

-

-

3,252

52

264

-

(299)

3,269

(4,560)

-

-

-

446

20

288

-

542

1,296

-

(19)

-

(37)

3,722

(1,291)

1,240

4,406

3,362

(895)

686

(39)

3,114

Total

£000

4,765

1,403

1,105

58

(218)

7,113

(4,560)

1,843

47

(37)

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

19 Inventories

Goods for resale

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

3,716

£000

1,393

Goods for resale includes components required to deliver managed services to customers. The cost of inventories charged 
to cost of sales in the year totalled £6.0m (FY22: £4.7m). 

20 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables 

Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables and credit notes

Trade receivables – net 

Other receivables 

Prepayments 

Commission contract asset

Accrued income 

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

21,456

(1,251)

20,205

2,363

9,180

2,938

4,568

39,254

11,112

(884)

10,228

737

6,434

2,098

2,626

22,123

The commission contract asset arose on the adoption of IFRS 15. For the year ended 31 March 2023 the impairment for this 
contract asset was immaterial (FY22: immaterial).  Other receivables in FY23 relate to amounts due from the administrators for 
the acquisition of Sungard (note 32).

There is £immaterial (FY22: £immaterial) expected credit loss against other receivables, see note 21.1. 

21 Credit quality of financial assets

The amounts of the maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date are as follows:

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

20,205

2,363

1,366

23,934

10,228

737

1,804

12,769

Trade receivables  

Other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

113

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

21 Credit quality of financial assets (continued)

21.1 Credit quality of trade receivables

The  Directors  monitor  the  quality  of  the  receivables  not  impaired  and  believe  them  to  be  recoverable.    The  non-impaired 
receivables  are  fully  performing  and  relate  to  independent  customers  with  no  history  of  default.  The  individually  impaired 
receivables  relate  to  receivables  over  365  days,  customers  in  financial  difficulty,  customer  acceptance  issues  and  cancelled 
contracts. 

The  ageing  analysis  of  trade  receivables  is  as  follows,  with  the  exposure  to  credit  risk  and  the  expected  credit  loss  in  the  
current year:

Year ended  
31 March 
2023 

Weighted 
average 
loss rate

Loss 
Allowance 

Credit 
impaired 

£000

18,450

2,212 

557

283

194 

(240)

21,456

(1,251)

20,205

0.5%

1.0%

2.0%

5.0%

10.0%

10.0%

N/A

(92)

(22)

(11)

(14)

(19)

24

(134)

No

No

No

No

No

No

Year ended  
31 March  
2022

£000

8,736

1,997

452

80

19

(172)

11,112

(884)

10,228

Current

1 to 30 days overdue

31 to 60 days overdue

61 to 90 days overdue

91 to 180 days overdue

> 180 days overdue

Gross trade debtors

Provision

Net trade debtors

As at 31 March 2023, trade receivables of £117k were provided for (31 March 2022: £85k). £325k has been provided for within 
the credit note provisions (31 March 2022: £799k). £809k has been provided for inaccurate billing (31 March 2022: £614k).  
No provision has been made against accrued income in the year ended 31 March 2023 (31 March 2022: £nil).

Trade debtor days were 46 at 31 March 2023 compared to 36 at 31 March 2022. Trade debtor days are calculated as gross 
trade debtors divided by revenue (incl. VAT) multiplied by 365.

114

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

21 Credit quality of financial assets (continued)

21.1 Credit quality of trade receivables (continued)

The provision is calculated by management on a specific basis based on their best estimate of recoverability considering the 
age and specific circumstances relating to the debtor. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the fair 
value of each class of receivable mentioned above. The Group does not hold any collateral as security.

Movements on the Group bad debt and credit note provisions were as follows:

Provision in 
relation to 
FY18  
and earlier 

Provision 
in relation 
to FY19

Provision 
in relation 
to FY20 

Provision 
in relation 
to FY21 

Provision in 
relation to 
FY22

Provision in 
relation to 
FY23

Total 
Provision

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

At 1 April 2021

Creation of provision

Utilisation of provision

At 31 March 2022

Creation of provision

Utilisation of provision

At 31 March 2023

3

-

-

3

-

(3)

-

141

-

(116)

25

-

(25)

-

326

-

(292)

34

-

(34)

-

634

-

(344)

290

-

(290)

-

-

832

(300)

532

1

(528)

5

-

-

-

-

2,122

(876)

1,246

1,104

832

(1,052)

884

2,123

(1,756)

1,251

21.2 Credit quality of cash and cash equivalents

The Group’s cash is held at accounts with Barclays Bank PLC and HSBC UK Bank PLC, both of which have a Standard and Poor’s 
rating of A. 

22 Trade and other payables

Trade payables

Other payables

Taxation and social security

Accruals

Deferred income

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

16,520

1,892

5,076

11,759

8,331

43,578

8,910

1,130

2,433

4,050

7,530

24,053

Trade payable days were 42 at 31 March 2023 compared to 37 as at 31 March 2022. Trade payable days are calculated as trade 
payables divided by total purchases (cost of sales and operating expenditure) multiplied by 365.

Of  the  deferred  income  balance  of  £7.5m  at  31  March  2022,  £6.7m  has  been  recognised  as  revenue  in  the  year  ended  
31 March 2023.

115

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

23 Contingent consideration

Contingent consideration due on acquisitions within one year:

- 7 Elements Limited

- Sungard DCs

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

450

2,540

2,990

422

-

422

Contingent consideration is based on the directors’ best estimate of future payments due at 31 March 2023 as detailed in note 
32. This has been settled subsequent to the yearend as outlined in note 34. Contingent consideration is level 3 within the fair 
value hierarchy.

116

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

24 Borrowings

Current

Lease liabilities

Term loans

Bank loans

Non-current

Lease liabilities

Term loans

Bank loans

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

10,804

475

-

11,279

29,400

20

33,631

63,051

4,086

508

-

4,594

13,359

496

-

13,855

At 31 March 2023, the Group was party to £87m of bank facilities with a maturity date of 25 April 2025. The facilities comprise 
a Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) of £80m (net £34m utilised at 31 March 2023) and a £7.0m Asset Financing Facility (“AFF”) 
(£2.3m utilised at 31 March 2023).

Term  loans  constitute  financing  arrangements  for  services  and  include  a  supplier  loan  of  £495k  for  an  unsecured  3  year 
maintenance contract. The AFF is provided by Lombard. 

The RCF is provided by a new four bank group of NatWest, Barclays, Bank of Ireland and Silicon Valley Bank (now part of 
HSBC UK Group), with Lombard Technology Services Ltd providing the Asset Financing Facility.  The borrowing cost of the 
facility is determined by the level of the Group’s leverage and has a borrowing cost of 175 basis points over SONIA at the 
Group’s current leverage levels. An arrangement fee of 75 basis points was payable upfront, in addition to a commitment 
fee  on  the  undrawn  portion.  The  Group  is  required  to  comply  with  financial  covenants  for  adjusted  leverage  (net  debt  to 
adjusted EBITDA), cashflow cover (adjusted cashflow to debt service, where adjusted cashflow is defined as adjusted EBITDA 
less tax paid, dividend payments, IFRS16 lease repayments and cash capital expenditure) and provisions relating to guarantor 
coverage such that guarantors must exceed a prescribed threshold of the Group’s gross assets, revenue and Adjusted EBITDA.  
Covenants are tested quarterly each year. No security has been provided. 

The RCF is drawn in short to medium-term tranches of debt that are repayable within 12 months of draw-down. These tranches 
of debt can be rolled over provided certain conditions are met, including compliance with all loan terms. The Group considers 
that it is unlikely it would not be in compliance and therefore, be unable to exercise its right to roll over the debt.  The Board 
therefore believe the Group has the ability and the intent to roll over the drawn RCF amounts when due and consequently 
has presented the RCF as a non-current liability. In addition to the financial covenants, the facility requires the Group to file 
audited financial accounts within 120 days of the yearend date alongside an audited compliance certificate, which the bank 
has extended for the current year. 

As noted in the basis of preparation, in March 2023, the Directors agreed with the bank amendments to the cash flow cover 
financial covenant to allow for several non-repeating acquisition related costs and to reset the covenant level to less stringent 
levels for the quarters ended March and June 2023 and quarters ending September and December 2023. There were no other 
material changes to the terms and conditions of the borrowings because of this amendment.  

Lease liabilities are comprised of secured and unsecured agreements.  Secured lease liabilities of £1.8m and secured term 
loans are secured against assets included within ROU assets with a carrying value of £1.8m (FY22: £3.7m).

117

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

24 Borrowings (continued)

24.1 Reconciliation of net debt

Revolving credit facility

Drawdown on facility

Repayment of facility

Finance costs in relation to RCF (non-cash)

Interest paid

Loan arrangement fees paid (cash)

Release of deferred arrangement fees (non-cash)

Movement in revolving credit facility

Opening balance

Closing Balance

Lease liabilities

New leases entered into (non-cash)

Leases acquired 

IFRS16 leases modifications (non-cash)

Leases terminated (non-cash)

Principal element of lease payments

Interest element of lease payments

Interest cost (cash)

Movement in lease liabilities

Opening balance

Closing balance

Term loans

New loans (non-cash)

Repayment of loans

Finance costs in relation to term loans (non-cash)

Interest paid

Movement in term loans

Opening balance

Closing balance

Cash

Net debt

All lines included above are cash unless otherwise stated.

118

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

£000

55,500

(21,500)

1,803

(1,751)

(713)

291

33,630

-

33,630

28,314

1,976

(629)

-

(6,901)

1,218

(1,218)

22,760

17,445

40,205

-

(508)

24

(24)

(508)

1,004

496

4,500

(4,500)

86

(86)

-

-

-

-

-

2,675

-

-

(813)

(3,745)

797

(797)

(1,883)

19,328

17,445

-

(487)

45

(45)

(487)

1,491

1,004

1,366

(72,965)

1,804

(16,645)

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

24 Borrowings (continued)

24.2 Terms and repayment schedule

RCF

Term Loans

Leases

24.3 Lease liabilities

Currency

GBP

GBP

GBP

Nominal  
interest rate

SONIA + 1.75%

1.6% - 2.0%

0.0% - 7.2%

Year of  
maturity

2025

2023-2025

2023-2035

Present 
value as at 
31 March 
2023

Future lease 
payments as  
at 31 March 
2023 

Present 
value as at 
31 March 
2022 

Future lease 
payments as 
at 31 March 
2022

Finance 
charges

Finance 
charges

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Not later than 1 year

After 1 year but not more than 5 years

After more than 5 years

10,804

20,565

8,833

1,420

2,973

553

40,202

4,946

12,224

23,538

9,386

45,148

4,086

7,593

5,766

868

1,638

795

17,445

3,301

20,746

25 Liquidity risk

The table below analyses the Group’s financial liabilities into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the 
balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date. These amounts disclosed in the table are the contracted undiscounted cash 
flows. Balances within 12 months equal their carrying balances as the impact of discounting is not significant.

Less than 1 year 

1 - 5 years 

More than 5 years

£000

£000

£000

At 31 March 2023

Bank loans

Leases

Term loans

Trade payables

Other payables

At 31 March 2022

Leases

Term loans

Trade payables

Other payables

2,755

12,224

475

16,520

1,892

33,866

4,086

508

8,910

1,132

14,636

35,700

23,538

20

-

-

-

9,386

-

-

-

59,258

9,386

102,510

7,593

496

-

-

8,089

5,766

-

-

-

5,766

17,445

1,004

8,910

1,132

28,491

The  interest  accrual  for  the  future  forecasted  borrowings  in  each  category  is  dependent  on  the  expected  level  of  funding 
required each month, with an applied interest rate of SONIA (forecast to be 5.5%) above the margin (which is a fixed percentage 
depending on the Group’s adjusted leverage in line with the facility agreement). 

119

£000

4,954

9,231

6,561

Total

£000

38,455

45,148

495

16,520

1,892

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

26 Provisions

At 1 April 2021

Additional provisions created during the period

Provisions acquired from business combination

Released during the period

Utilised during the period

At 31 March 2022

Additional provisions created during the period

Provisions acquired from business combination

Released during the period

Utilised during the period

At 31 March 2023

FY23 Analysed as:

Current 

Non-current

FY22 Analysed as:

Current

Non-current

Scheme fees 
provision 

Dilapidations 
provision 

Onerous 
service contract 
provision

£000

£000

£000

Total  
provision

£000

553

-

-

(527)

(26)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2,695

1,189

-

-

(1)

3,883

8,426

692

-

-

13,001

1,841

11,160

13,001

-

3,883

3,883

21

-

577

-

(598)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,269

1,189

577

(527)

(625)

3,883

8,426

692

-

-

13,001

1,841

11,160

13,001

-

3,883

3,883

The Scheme fees provision represented costs which were potentially repayable on adviser fees in relation to the historical FCA 
Investigation. This provision was released in FY22 as repayment is no longer considered probable.

The dilapidations provision represents the estimated costs associated with returning certain leasehold properties to the original 
condition upon exiting the lease. Given there is estimation in determining the quantum of provisions to be recognised a third-
party  expert  was  engaged  to  determine  appropriate  estimates.  This  is  not  considered  to  be  a  critical  estimate  as  it  is  not 
expected to be subject to material reversal in future periods given the specialist input used to inform the estimate, and the 
nature of the estimate. After initial measurement, any subsequent adjustments to the dilapidations provision will be recorded 
against the original amount included in right of use assets with a corresponding adjustment to future depreciation charges.  The 
utilisation of the dilapidations provision will be in line with the end of the leasehold properties lease terms to which the provisions 
relate.  The increase of £8.4m through additional provisions created have resulted from new leases being agreed on acquired 
leasehold properties in the year. 

The  onerous  service  contract  provision  related  to  the  costs  associated  with  third  party  services  arrangements  no  longer  
utilised by the business and service contracts with customers where the Group estimates the cost to fulfil the contract will exceed 
the benefit.

120

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

27 Share capital

At 1 April 2021

New shares issues

At 31 March 2022

New shares issued

At 31 March 2023

Ordinary shares of 0.1p each

Share premium

Number

£000

£000

156,165,710

826,272

156,991,982

-

156,991,982

156

1

157

-

157

73,267

-

73,267

-

73,267

The total shares held in treasury at 31 March 2023 was 728,722 at an average cost of £1.23 per share therefore, a value of 
£897,479 (31 March 2022: 2,170,203 shares at an average cost of £1.23p, for a total value of £2,672,777).

The number of shares authorised is the same as the number of shares issued. Ordinary shareholders have the right to attend, 
vote and speak at meetings, receive dividends, and receive a return on assets in the case of a winding up. 

The common control reserve represents the difference between the net assets acquired and the fair value of consideration 
transferred on the acquisition of Redcentric Holdings Limited via demerger from Redstone plc in 2013.

28 Share-based payments

At 31 March 2023, the Group had the following share-based payment arrangements in place:

Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

The Group operates a Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) under which the Executive Directors and key management personnel are 
awarded nil cost options that will vest subject to the achievement of performance conditions relating to the growth in earnings 
per share.

Save As You Earn (SAYE)

The  Group  operates  a  HMRC  approved  SAYE  option  plan  under  which  it  offers  its  UK  based  colleagues  the  opportunity  to 
participate in a share purchase plan. To participate in the plan, the colleagues are required to save an amount of their gross 
monthly salary, up to a maximum of £500 per month, for a period of 36 months. Under the terms of the plan, at the end of the 
three-year period the colleagues are entitled to purchase shares using funds saved at a price 20% below the market price at 
grant date. Only colleagues who remain in service and save the required amount of their gross monthly salary for 36 consecutive 
months will become entitled to purchase the shares. Colleagues who cease their employment, do not save the required amount 
of their gross monthly salary in any month before the 36-month period expires, or elect not to exercise their options to purchase 
shares will be refunded their saved amounts.

The Group recognised the following expense for its share-based payments:

Equity-settled share-based charge on LTIP scheme

Equity-settled share-based charge on SAYE plan

National Insurance arising on share options

121

Year ended  
31 March 2023

Year ended  
31 March 2022

£000

861

182

213

1,256

£000

858

209

114

1,181

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

28 Share-based payments (continued) 

The fair value of the equity-settled share options granted is estimated as at the date of grant using a binomial model, taking into 
account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The following table illustrates the number and weighted 
average exercise prices (WAEP) of, and movements in, share options during the year.

LTIP  
(number)

SAYE  
(number)

Total  
(number)

WAEP  
(pence)

Balance at 31 March 2021

Issued in the period

Forfeited in the period

Cancelled in the period

Exercised in the year

Lapsed in the year

Balance at 31 March 2022

Issued in the period

Forfeited in the period

Cancelled in the period

Exercised in the year

Lapsed in the year

2,847,546

1,965,877

(295,851)

894,222

876,638

-

-

(366,395)

(836,272)

-

3,681,300

2,116,726

(159,379)

(264,670)

(1,080,567)

-

(5,219)

(4,515)

1,394,731

562,199

-

(338,974)

(360,914)

(48,832)

3,741,768

2,842,515

(295,851)

(366,395)

(841,491)

(4,515)

5,076,031

2,678,925

(159,379)

(603,644)

(1,441,481)

(48,832)

Balance at 31 March 2023

4,293,410

1,208,210

5,501,620

22.1p

9.6p

0.1p

103.7p

0.7p

119.6p

26.1p

20.2p

0.1p

59.1p

15.9p

102.7p

22.3p

The weighted average remaining contractual life for the share options outstanding at 31 March 2023 is 7 years and 6 months (31 
March 2022: 6 years and 9 months). The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at the end of the year was 0.1p to 119.6p. 
Share options outstanding at the end of the year with approximate remaining average life are as follows:

Exercise price

0.10

63.00

119.60

108.33

99.87

96.07

Number,  
year ended  
31 March 2023

Life at  
31 March 2023

Number,  
year ended  
31 March 2022

Life at  
31 March 2022

4,293,410

8 years 11 months

3,681,300

8 years 5 months

-

-

143,577

1 year 0 months

369,393

241,311

1 year 0 months

2 year 0 months

93,238

2 year 0 months

168,998

3 years 0 months

496,873

2 years 4 months

615,029

3 years 4 months

474,522

2 years 11 months

-

-

5,501,620

7 years 6 months

5,076,031

6 years, 9 months

122

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

28 Share-based payments (continued) 

The following table illustrates the status of the options outstanding at the end of the year:

31 March 2023 
Number of 
options

31 March 2023 
WAEP

31 March 2022 
Number of 
options

31 March 2022 
WAEP

25,000

4,268,410

1,208,210

5,501,620

0.1p

0.1p

101.4p

22.3p

-

3,681,300

1,394,731

5,076,031

0.0p

0.1p

94.6p

26.1p

Performance conditions satisfied

Subject to performance conditions

Save-As-You-Earn

Outstanding at the end of the year

29 Capital commitments 

The Group had no contracted but not provided for capital commitments at 31 March 2023 (31 March 2022: £nil) included within 
trade and other payables.

30 Pensions 

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme for eligible employees. The charge for the year ended 31 March 
2023 was £1.2m (FY22: £0.8m). At the year- end there was a pension creditor of £0.3m (31 March 2022: £0.2m).

31 Subsidiaries 

The undertakings whose results and financial position are consolidated within the Group financial statements at 31 March 2023 
are as follows:

Principal activity 

Country of 
incorporation 

% of ordinary 
share capital 
owned

Held directly by Redcentric plc 

Redcentric Solutions Limited

Managed Services

England and Wales

100%

Held indirectly 

Redcentric Solutions Private Limited

Redcentric Support Services Private Limited

Support services

Support services

India

India

Piksel Industry Solutions Limited

Dormant

England and Wales

7 Elements Limited

Hotchilli Internet Limited

Security services

Scotland

Dormant

England and Wales

4D Data Centres Limited (acquired on 27 June 2022)

Managed Services

England and Wales

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

All companies have a registered office of Central House, Beckwith Knowle, Harrogate HG3 1UG, except Redcentric Solutions 
Private Limited and Redcentric Support Services Private Limited which have a registered office at 8th Floor, My Home Twitza, Plot 
No. 30/A Sy No. 83/1, TSIIC Knowledge City, Raidurg, Hyderabad Rangareddy Telangana 500081 INDIA, and 7 Elements Limited 
which has a registered office of 4-5 Lochside Way, Edinburgh Park, Edinburgh, Scotland, EH12 9DT.

123

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary

Current year acquisitions

4D Data Centres

On 27 June 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired 100% of the share capital of 4D Data 
Centres Limited (“4D”) for £10.1m consideration paid in cash.  The business provides colocation, cloud and connectivity services 
to mid-market customers.  The primary purpose of the business combination is to scale the Group’s existing revenues in this area 
with significant synergies expected as the acquisition is integrated into the Group.  Management consider signing of the share 
purchase agreement (SPA) on the 27 June 2022 as the change of control and therefore, acquisition date for the transaction. 

The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred:

Cash

Deferred consideration 1

True up payment (deferred) 2

£000s

9,842

162

119

10,123

1 The deferred consideration is a delayed R&D claim refund due from HMRC which is to be paid to the Shareholders on receipt. 

2 The true up payment is the additional amount due following the update to fair values at the time of completion, when the original cash transfer was based 
on estimates. 

The  Group  incurred  acquisition  related  costs  of  £0.2m  on  legal  fees,  due  diligence  costs  and  direct  integration  costs.  
These costs have been included in exceptional costs in note 9.

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as at the date of acquisition:

Tangible fixed assets

Customer relationships

Brand

Right of use assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Deferred tax

Trade and other payables

Deferred income

IFRS 16 leases

Provisions

Corporation tax receivable 

Total identifiable net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration

Note

16

15

17

18

22

24

15

124

Fair value 
£000s

2,089

6,300

200

1,287

920

1,053

(1,787)

(1,647)

(764)

(1,976)

(692)

186

5,169

4,954

10,123

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued)

The goodwill arising on acquisition represents the future income from new customers, the potential to cross-sell existing Group 
products to the existing 4D customer base, as well as the assembled workforce which increases the Group’s competence in key 
growth areas of the Security Services sector.

The fair value of the acquired customer relationships is £6.3m. To estimate fair value of the customer relationships intangible 
asset, a multi-period excess earnings “MEEM” approach has been adopted, and this approach considers the present value of 
cash flows expected to be generated by the customer relationships, excluding any cash flows related to contributory assets.

On 28 February 2023, the trade, assets and liabilities of 4D were hived in to the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions 
Limited. For the 8 months ended 28 February 2023, 4D contributed revenue of £5.3m and profits, before allocation of group 
overheads, share based payments and tax, of £1.1m to the Group’s results. 

Sungard 

Consulting

On 7 June 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired the consulting business from Sungard 
Availability  Services  (UK)  Limited  (in  administration)  for  £4.2m  consideration  paid  in  cash.  The  business  provides  services  in 
respect  of  business  continuity,  cloud  and  infrastructure,  cyber  resilience,  disaster  recovery  and  hybrid  cloud  transformation 
services alongside the provision and operation of Cloud related services.  Management consider signing of the Agreement for 
the sale of assets as the change of control and therefore, acquisition date for the transaction. No assets were acquired or liabilities 
assumed from the Consulting business transaction. 

Data Centres

On 6 July 2022, the Group’s trading subsidiary Redcentric Solutions Limited acquired certain business and assets relating to three 
data centres “DCs” from Sungard Availability Services (UK) Limited (in administration) for initial consideration of £10.1m paid in 
cash and a cash prepayment of £3.4m for a payment made to the administrators in advance for a license to occupy on the three 
DCs, and contingent consideration with a maximum potential value of £19.0m depending on customer retention and certain 
performance criteria. 

As outlined in note 2.1, the DCs and Consulting acquisitions have been treated as a single transaction. The resulting change 
due  to  this  treatment  as  a  single  transaction  is  that  the  goodwill  from  the  acquisitions  is  considered  in  aggregate  rather  
than separately.  

The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred for the combined 
transaction:

Cash

Prepayment (paid in cash)

Contingent consideration3

£000s

14,320

3,369

2,540

20,229

3 The contingent consideration is an additional amount based on an agreed sliding scale threshold of customers committing to long term contracts with 
the business post-acquisition, determined by the recurring monthly revenue value by customer and by each of the three data centres. This amount is the 
Board’s best estimate as at the acquisition date of the amount due as contingent consideration, discounted to present value.  

The Group incurred acquisition related costs of £0.3m on legal fees, due diligence costs and direct integration costs.  
These costs have been included in exceptional costs in note 9.

125

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as at the date of acquisition:

Tangible fixed assets

Customer relationships

Right of use assets

Prepayments 

Deferred tax

Accruals

Other creditors

Total identifiable net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration

Note

16

15

17

18

15

Fair value 
£000s

9,630

8,800

2,624

745

(4,362)

(185)

(293)

16,959

3,270

20,229

The goodwill arising on acquisition represents the future income from new customers, the potential to cross-sell existing Group 
products  to  the  existing  Sungard  customer  base,  which  increases  the  Group’s  competence  in  key  growth  areas  of  the  Security 
Services sector.

The fair value of the acquired customer relationships is £8.8m. To estimate fair value of the customer relationships intangible asset, 
a multi-period excess earnings “MEEM” approach has been adopted, and this approach considers the present value of cash flows 
expected to be generated by the customer relationships, excluding any cash flows related to contributory assets.

The DCs earned revenue of £36.3m and profits, before allocation of group overheads, share based payments and tax, of £2.5m in 
the period since acquisition.

The consulting business earned revenue of £0.6m and profits, before allocation of group overheads, share based payments and tax, 
of £0.2m in the period since acquisition.

The net cash flow for the acquisitions were as follows:

Cash paid for 4D

Cash paid for Sungard, including prepayment 

Less: cash acquired

Less: Piksel deferred consideration

The Piksel deferred consideration was paid in April 2023 and related to the acquisition in FY22.

£000s

10,123

17,689

(1,053)

(153)

26,606

126

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 

Unaudited pro-forma full year information 

The following unaudited pro-forma summary presents the Group as if the business acquired during FY23 had been part of the 
Group since 1 April 2022.  This includes the results of the acquired business, depreciation of the acquired assets and an amount 
of £8.2m relating to the amortisation of the acquired intangible assets recognised on acquisition. This information is presented 
purely for illustrative purposes and does not necessarily reflect the actual underlying results that would have occurred.

Pro-forma year ended 
31 March 2023

£000s

156,574

(9,954)

Revenue

Loss before tax

Prior year acquisitions 

The following subsidiaries were acquired in the prior period. 

Piksel Industry Solutions Limited

On  30  September  2021,  the  Group  acquired  100%  of  the  issued  share  capital  of  Piksel  Industry  Solutions  Limited  “Piksel” 
obtaining control at this date. The acquisition is in line with the Group’s strategy to grow its operations, both organically and 
through acquisitions. Piksel is a provider of IT modernisation and digital transformation services focussing primarily on the public 
cloud. Taking control of Piksel significantly enhances Redcentric’s service offerings in both cloud and security and provides a 
complementary customer base with excellent cross-sell opportunities.  

The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred:

Cash6

Novation of Intercompany loans7

Deferred consideration8

£000s

9,459

3,069

183

12,711

6  Of the total cash consideration, $750k (£549k) was held in Escrow for a period of 12 months after which time the balance was released to the vendor less 

any claims made by the Group to offset undisclosed liabilities 

7  An intercompany receivable balance between Piksel and the seller was novated to the acquiring group company (Redcentric Solutions Limited) as part of 

the acquisition.

8 Deferred consideration is to offset against future costs incurred as part of the transitional services agreement between Piksel and the seller.

127

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of £0.9m on legal fees, due diligence costs and direct integration costs relating to 
systems migration etc.  These costs were included in exceptional costs in FY22.

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as the date of acquisition:

Tangible fixed assets

Customer relationships

Other intangible assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Intercompany loans

Corporation tax receivable

Deferred tax

Trade and other payables

Deferred income

Payroll and social security creditors

VAT liability

Onerous contract provisions

Total identifiable net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration

Fair value 
£000s 

38

1,868

202

2,418

965

3,069

557

936

(2,940)

(1,817)

(345)

(344)

(577)

4,030

8,681

12,711

The goodwill arising on acquisition represented future income from new customers, the potential to cross-sell existing Group 
products to the established Piksel customer base as well and the assembled workforce which increases the Group’s competence 
in key growth areas of the managed IT services sector allowing the Group to provide additional services to its existing customer 
base, together with the benefits to the Group in merging the business with its existing infrastructure and the anticipated future 
operating synergies from the new combination.

The  fair  value  of  the  acquired  customer  relationships  was  £1.9m.    To  estimate  the  fair  value  of  the  customer  relationships 
intangible  asset,  a  multi-period  excess  earnings  method  “MEEM”  approach  has  been  adopted,  this  approach  considers  the 
present value of net cash flows expected to be generated by the customer relationships, by excluding any cash flows related to 
contributory assets.

On  28  February  2022  the  trade,  assets  and  liabilities  of  Piksel  were  hived  out  to  the  Group’s  trading  subsidiary  Redcentric 
Solutions Limited. For the 5 months ended 28 February 2022, Piksel contributed revenue of £4.9m and profits, before allocation 
of group overheads, share based payments and tax, of £0.3m to the Group’s results.

128

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 

7 Elements Limited

On 14 March 2022 the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital on 7 Elements Limited “7 Elements” obtaining control 
at this date.  7 Elements is an industry leading provider of security testing, incident response management and bespoke security 
consultancy  services.  The  acquisition  significantly  enhances  the  Group’s  service  portfolio  with  additional  capacity  within  the 
increasingly important security market.  The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of 
consideration transferred:

Cash9

Contingent consideration10

9  Of the cash consideration of £2.4m above, £0.13m was paid during FY23.

10 The final contingent consideration amount was £0.45m paid on 3 April 2023.

£000s

2,409

422

2,831

129

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

32 Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of £0.1m on legal fees and due diligence costs.  These costs were included in 
exceptional costs in FY22.

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets and liabilities assumed as the date of acquisition:

Other intangible assets

Customer relationships

Trade and other receivables

Cash & cash equivalents

Trade and other payables

Payroll and social security creditors

Deferred Tax

VAT liability

Corporation tax liability

Total identifiable net assets acquired

Goodwill

Total consideration

Fair value 
£000s 

3

878

168

465

(11)

(1)

(220)

(50)

(52)

1,180

1,651

2,831

The goodwill arising on acquisition represented future income from new customers, the potential to cross-sell existing group 
products to established 7 Elements customer base and the assembled workforce which increases the Group’s competence in 
key growth areas of the managed IT services sector.

The fair value of the acquired customer relationships is £0.9m. To estimate the fair value of the customer relationships intangible 
asset,  a  multi-period  excess  earnings  method  “MEEM”  approach  has  been  adopted,  this  approach  considers  the  present  
value  of  net  cash  flows  expected  to  be  generated  by  the  customer  relationships,  by  excluding  any  cash  flows  related  to 
contributory assets.

7 Elements earned revenue of £0.1m and delivered profits, before allocation of group overheads, share-based payments and 
tax of £0.1m in the period since acquisition to 31 March 2022.

130

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements    
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

33 Related parties 

Directors’ emoluments are disclosed in the Annual Remuneration Report on page 70 and compensation of key management 
personnel is disclosed in note 11.

There were no other transactions with related parties in the year to 31 March 2023.

34 Subsequent events 

Subsequent to the year end, the consideration for the Sungard acquisition was finalised.  The amount of contingent consideration 
at the yearend was based on the expectations at the time of the conversion of short-term customer contracts into contracts 
with a term of 12 months or more from the date of the acquisition, which was determined to be £2.75m (discounted at yearend 
to £2.54m).  The final position has now been crystallised on the anniversary date of the acquisition in line with the purchase 
agreement, resulting in a payment of £0.4m made in July 2023.  As a result, an exceptional credit of £2.14m will be recognised in 
the statement of comprehensive income in FY24 as a fair value adjustment to contingent consideration.

131

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsRedcentric plc  
Company Balance Sheet as at 31 March 2023  

Fixed Assets

Investments

Current Assets

Debtors

Current liabilities

Creditors – amounts falling due within one year

Provisions

Net current liabilities

Net assets

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Share option reserve

Own shares held in treasury

Retained earnings:

At the beginning of the year

Profit for the year

Other changes in retained earnings

Total shareholders’ funds

Note

31 March  
2023

£’000

31 March 
2022

£’000

2

3

4

5

105,096

105,096

104,051

104,051

406

406

(21,607)

(16,242)

-

-

(21,201)

(15,836)

83,895

88,215

157

73,267

8,887

(898)

9,621

-

(7,139)

2,482

83,895

157

73,267

7,843

(2,673)

629

14,633

(5,641)

9,621

88,215

The notes on pages 134 to 138 are an integral part of these financial statements. 

The financial statements of Redcentric Plc (Registration Number 08397584) on pages 132 to 133 were approved by the Board on 
24 August 2023 and are signed on its behalf by:

David Senior 
Chief Financial Officer

132

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsCompany Statement of Changes in Equity     
for the year ended 31 March 2023

Called 
up Share 
Capital

Share 
Premium

£000

£000

Share 
option 
reserve

£000

Own shares 
held in 
treasury 

Retained 
Earnings

£000

£000

156

73,267

6,776

(32)

629

14,633

Balance at 1 April 2021

Profit for the period

Transactions with owners

Dividend paid to shareholders

Issue of new shares 

Share option exercises

Share buyback

Share-based payments

At 31 March 2022

Profit for the period

Transactions with owners

Dividend paid to shareholders

Issue of new shares

Share option exercises

Share buyback

Share-based payments

At 31 March 2023

Total 
Equity

£000

80,796

14,633

(5,627)

(5,627)

-

(14) 

-

-

1

11

(2,666)

1,067

-

-

(5,593)

(5,593)

(2,673)

9,621

88,215

-

1,775

(1,546)

-

-

-

-

(898)

2,482

-

229

-

1,044

83,895

-

-

-

25

(2,666)

-

-

-

-

-

-

1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

157

73,267

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

157

73,267

-

-

-

-

-

1,067

7,843

-

-

-

-

-

1,044

8,887

133

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the Company Financial Statements     
for the year ended 31 March 2023

1 Accounting policies

These separate financial statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006. The Company 
meets  the  definition  of  a  qualifying  entity  under  FRS  100  ‘Application  of  Financial  Reporting  Requirements’  issued  by  the 
Financial Reporting Council (FRC). Accordingly, these financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard  101  Reduced  Disclosure  Framework  (“FRS  101”).    In  preparing  these  financial  statements,  the  Company  applies 
the  recognition,  measurement  and  disclosure  requirements  of  UK-adopted  international  accounting  standards  (“Adopted 
IFRSs”), but makes amendments where necessary in order to comply with Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where 
advantage of the FRS 101 disclosure exemptions has been taken. These policies have all been applied consistently throughout 
the year unless otherwise stated.

In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the following 
disclosures:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

a cash flow statement and related notes; 

comparative period reconciliations for share capital, tangible fixed assets, intangible assets and investments; 

disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries; 

disclosures in respect of capital management;  

the effects of new but not yet effective IFRS;

disclosures in respect of the compensation of key management personnel; and

disclosures of transactions with a management entity that provides key management personnel services to the Company.

As the consolidated financial statements of the ultimate parent undertaking include the equivalent disclosures, the Company 
has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 available in respect of the following disclosures:

• 

IFRS 2 ‘Share based payments’ in respect of group settled share-based payments

•  Certain disclosures required by IAS 36 ‘Impairment of assets’ in respect of the impairment of goodwill and indefinite life 

intangible assets; 

•  Certain disclosures required by IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ in respect of business combinations undertaken by the 

Company in the current and prior periods including the comparative period reconciliation for goodwill; and

•  Certain  disclosures  required  by  IFRS  13  ‘Fair  Value  Measurement’  and  the  disclosures  required  by  IFRS  7  ‘Financial 

Instrument Disclosures’.

The accounting policies set, unless otherwise stated, have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these financial 
statements.

1.1 Investments

Investments in subsidiaries are carried at cost less impairment which is based on the fair value at acquisition. Investments are 
reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying values may not be recoverable. 
If any such indication exists and where the carrying amounts exceed the estimated recoverable amount, the assets or cash 
generating units are written down to their recoverable amount.

1.2 Income taxes

The taxation expense charged in the statement of comprehensive income represents the sum of the current tax expense and 
the deferred tax expense.

The current tax payable is based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from accounting profit as reported in 
the Group statement of comprehensive income because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible 

134

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the Company Financial Statements     
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued) 

1.2 Income taxes (continued)

in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The liability for current tax is measured using 
tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities  in  the  financial  statements  and  the  corresponding  tax  bases  used  in  the  computation  of  taxable  profit  and  is 
accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax is provided for on all temporary differences at the balance 
sheet date between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes, with the 

following exceptions:

•  where the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or an asset or liability in a transaction that is 

not a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss;

• 

• 

in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal 
of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future; and

deferred  income  tax  assets  are  recognised  only  to  the  extent  that  it  is  probable  that  taxable  profits  will  be  available 
against which deductible temporary differences carried forward tax credits or tax losses can be utilised.

1.3 Dividends

Dividends payable to equity shareholders are included in the financial statements within ‘other creditors’ when a final dividend 
is approved by shareholders in a general meeting.  Interim dividends to equity shareholders approved by the board during the 
financial year are not included in the financial statements until paid.

Dividends receivable from the Company’s investments are recorded in the Company income statement once the dividend has 
been declared and approved by the Board.

1.4 Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Company has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is 
probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, and a reliable 
estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

1.5 Treasury shares

Redcentric  Plc  shares  held  by  the  Company  are  deducted  from  equity  as  “treasury  shares”  and  are  recognised  at  cost. 
Consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the proceeds from 
sale and the original cost being taken to reserves. No gain or loss is recognised in the Income Statement on the purchase, sale, 
issue or cancellation of equity shares. 

1.6 Share based payments

The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees of the Group is measured by reference to the fair value of the award at 
the date at which they are granted and is recognised as an expense over the vesting period, which ends on the date at which 
the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award. Fair value is determined by an external valuer using an appropriate 
pricing model for which the assumptions are approved by the Directors. In valuing equity-settled transactions, only vesting 
conditions linked to the market price of the shares of the Company are considered.

No expense is recognised in the subsidiary company for awards that do not ultimately vest, except for awards where vesting 
is conditional upon a market condition, which are treated as vesting irrespective of whether or not the market condition is 
satisfied, provided that all other performance conditions are satisfied.

At each balance sheet date before vesting, the cumulative expense is calculated, representing the extent to which the vesting 
period has expired and management’s best estimate of the achievement or otherwise of non-market conditions, number of 

135

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the Company Financial Statements     
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

1.6 Share based payments (continued)

equity instruments that will ultimately vest or in the case of an instrument subject to a market condition, be treated as vesting 
described above. The movement in the cumulative expense since the previous balance sheet date is recognised in the income 
statement, with a corresponding entry in equity.

Where the terms of an equity-settled award are modified or a new award is designated as replacing a cancelled or settled 
award, the existing charge is recognised immediately. In addition, an expense is recognised over the remainder of the new 
vesting period for the incremental fair value of any modification, based on the difference between the fair value of the original 
award and the fair value of the modified award, both as measured on the date of the modification. No reduction is recognised 
if this difference is negative.

Where  an  equity-settled  award  is  cancelled,  it  is  treated  as  if  it  had  vested  on  the  date  of  cancellation,  and  any  expense 
not yet recognised for the award is recognised immediately. Any compensation paid up to the fair value of the award at the 
cancellation or settlement date is deducted from equity, with any excess over fair value being treated as an expense in the 
income statement.

The costs of equity-settled transactions with group employees are settled by Redcentric Solutions Limited on behalf of the 
parent Company and added to the cost of the investment in the parent Company.

The Company does not operate any cash settled share-based payment schemes.

1.7 Key judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty

There were no critical accounting judgements that would have a material effect on the amounts recognised in the Company’s 
financial statements or key sources of estimation uncertainty at the balance sheet date that would have a significant risk of 
causing a material adjustment to the carrying value of assets and liabilities within the next financial year.  Impairment reviews 
show  significant  headroom  and  there  are  no  additional  indicators  to  suggest  that  the  Company’s  investments  should  be 
impaired. 

1.8 Parent company profit and loss account

As  permitted  by  Section  408  of  the  Companies  Act  2006,  the  Parent  Company  has  not  presented  its  own  profit  and  
loss account.   

2 Investments held as fixed assets

Investments in subsidiaries

Capital contribution related to share-based payments for subsidiaries

Year ended  
31 March  
2023

Year ended 
31 March  
2022

£000

£000

96,062

9,034

96,062

7,989

105,096

104,051

All of the Company’s investments are unlisted. Details of subsidiary undertakings are included in note 31 of the Group financial 
statements.

The Company’s investments have been tested for impairment and, to confirm whether an impairment is necessary, management 
compares the carrying value to the value in use.  

The value in use has been calculated using budgeted cash flow projections to the period of 31 March 2025, extrapolated for 
a further three years by an average annual revenue growth rate of 3.5% (FY22: 2.0%). A terminal value based on a perpetuity 
calculation using a 2.0% real growth rate was then added (FY22: 0.0% growth).

136

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the Company Financial Statements     
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

2 Investments held as fixed assets (continued)

In addition to revenue growth, the key assumptions used in the impairment testing were as follows:

•  Gross margin percentage increasing to 66% (FY22: 63%)

•  Operating costs increasing by 3.0% (FY22: 1.5%), which is lower than inflation as some costs have been fixed to FY25

• 

Pre-tax discount rate of 11.2% (FY22: 11.8%) (post tax rate of 10.84% (FY22: 7.2%)) estimated using a weighted average 
cost of capital, adjusted to reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the 
Group; and

• 

Terminal growth rate percentage is consistent with the market the entity operates in for real growth.

A reasonably possible adverse movement in any of the above key assumptions made would not give rise to impairment.

3 Debtors

Year ended  
31 March  
2023

Year ended 
31 March  
2022

£000

£000

Deferred tax asset on tax losses

406

406

4 Creditors – amounts falling due within one year

Amounts owed to subsidiaries

Year ended  
31 March  
2023

Year ended 
31 March  
2022

£000

£000

21,607

16,242

Amounts due to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and have no fixed payment terms.

137

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsNotes to the Company Financial Statements     
for the year ended 31 March 2023 (continued)

5 Provisions

At 1 April 2021

Additional provision created during the period

Utilised during the period

Released during the period

At 31 March 2022

Additional provisions created during the period

Utilised during the period

Released during the period

At 31 March 2023

Scheme Fees  
provision

£000

554

-

(26)

(528)

-

-

-

-

-

The  scheme  fees  provision  represented  costs  repayable  on  adviser  fees  in  relation  to  the  historical  FCA  Investigation.  
The provision was released in FY22 as repayment is no longer considered probable.

6 Share capital

During  FY22  the  Company  purchased,  and  held  in  treasury,  2,170,203  of  its  ordinary  share  capital  for  total  proceeds  of 
£2,666,246. No such purchase has been made in FY23. During the year 1,441,481 treasury shares have been utilised for various 
share option exercises, leaving 728,722 shares held in treasury at 31 March 2023 (31 March 2022: 2,170,203).

7 Auditor’ remuneration

The Company audit fee is £45,000 (FY22: £30,000). This fee was borne by another Group company.

8 Related parties

The Company has taken exemption not to disclose transactions with entities wholly owned by the Group.

Directors’  emoluments  are  disclosed  in  the  Annual  Report  on  Remuneration  of  the  consolidated  financial  statements  on  
page 70.

There were no other transactions with related parties in the year to 31 March 2023.

138

Annual Report and Accounts 2023Financial statementsAnnual Report and Accounts 2023

Financial statements

Directors and advisers     

Directors

Executive 

Peter Brotherton – Chief Executive Officer

David Senior – Chief Financial Officer

Non-executive

Nick Bate

Alan Aubrey

Company Secretary

Nick Heron

Company number

08397584

Registered Office

Central House 
Beckwith Knowle 
Harrogate 
HG3 1UG

Auditor

KPMG LLP 
Quayside House 
110 Quayside 
Newcastle upon Tyne  
Tyne and Wear  
NE1 3DX

Nominated adviser and broker

finnCap Limited 
1 Bartholomew Close 
London 
EC1A 7BL

Registrars

Link Group 
Central Square 
29 Wellington Street 
Leeds 

LS1 4DL

Legal advisors to the Group

Travers Smith 
10 Snow Hill 
London 
EC1A 2AL

Clarion Solicitors 
Elizabeth House 
13-19 Queen Street 
Leeds LS1 2TW

139

Head office

Central House

Beckwith Knowle

Harrogate 

HG3 1UG

T 0800 983 2522

E sayhello@redcentricplc.com

W www.redcentricplc.com